2 Operacion

This manual is used for both GSK928TD system and
GSK928TD-L system. However, the contents are described based on

GSK928TD system.
This manual describes the various matters concerning the

operations of this CNC system as much as possible. However, it is
impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or
unallowable operations due to space limitation and product specific
applications. Therefore, the matters not specially described herein
should be considered as “impossible” or “unallowable”.
This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co.,

Ltd. All rights are reserved. It is illegal for any organization or
individual to publish or reprint this manual. GSK CNC Equipment Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability.
GSK928TD Turning CNC System User Manual
Preface
Dear users,
It is our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK928TD
turning machine CNC system (hereafter referred to as “system”) produced
by GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
This manual covers the use of the system and related precautions.
Warnings
Improper operations may cause unexpected accidents.
Before using the system, please read this manual thoroughly.
Note the following precautions before using the manual:
● Connect the Emergency Stop button of the system. As the emergency

stop input of the system adopts a normally closed contact, the system
will issue an alarm (not a system fault) after Power On if the emergency
button is poorly connected or connected as a normal-open contact.
● Set the program reference point according to the actual installation

position of the tool. If the Program Reference Point Return function is
used before the reference point is set, unexpected accidents may occur.
Special notes: The power supply fixed on/in the cabinet is

exclusively used for the CNC systems developed
by GSK.
It cannot be applied for other purposes. Otherwise
it may result in serious danger.
II
Safety and Precautions
Declaration!
z We try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this
manual. However, it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all
the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too
many possibilities. Therefore, the matters not specially described
herein should be considered as “impossible” or “unallowable”.
Warning！
z Before installing, connecting, programming and operating the product,
please read this manual and the manual provided by the machine tool
builder carefully, and operate the product according to these manuals.
Otherwise, the operation may cause damage to the product and
machine tool, or even cause personal injury.
Caution！
z The functions and specifications (e.g., precision and speed) described
in this manual are only for this product itself. For those CNC machine
tools with this product installed, the actual function configuration and
specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders.
Moreover, the function configuration and specifications of the CNC
machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder.
z Please refer to the user manual issued by the machine tool builder for
the function and meaning of each key on the panel.
All specifications and designs in this manual are subject to change without notice.
III
Safety precautions
Please read the safety precautions carefully before connecting and using the
system.
The user must observe the safety operation specifications to ensure personal
and equipment safety.
The user must observe the related safety specifications described in the user
manual issued by GSK. Never attempt to operate the system before you are fully
familiar with its contents.
The user must observe the safety operation specifications about the machine
tool described in the user manual issued by the machine tool builder.
The user must be fully familiar with the contents of this manual and
the one issued by the machine tool builder before operating the
machine tool or controlling the machine tool by editing programs.
Ⅰ Meanings of signs
Warning Failure to observe the specified operation methods or

procedures may cause death.
Caution Improper operation may cause personal injury or equipment

damage.
Note Improper use may cause damage to the equipment and

product.
It reminds the user of important contents.
IV
Ⅱ Precautions
1) Inspection and acceptance
Caution ● It is not allowed to use damaged or defective products.
2) Transport and storage
Note ● Guard the products against moisture during transit and storage;
do not climb up or stand on the packages of the products, or
place heavy objects on the packages; do not pile up the
packages more than 5 layers; avoid impact and scratch to the
front panel and LCD screen.
3）Installation
Caution ● Protect the system from sunlight and raindrops because the
shell of the system is not waterproof.
Note
z Prevent dust, corrosive air, liquid, conductors and inflammable
substances from entering the system.
z Keep the system away from inflammable and explosive
substances. Avoid places where there is powerful
electromagnetic interference.
z Install the system firmly in case of vibration.
4）Connection
Warning ● Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the
connection. No damage should be caused to the connecting
wires. Do not press or open the cover of the system with power
on.
V
Caution ● The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must

accord with the manual.
● Wet hands are dangerous to grasp the plug or the switch.
Note ● The connection must be proper and firm.

● The system must be earthed.
5）Debugging
Warning ● Make sure that the parameters of the system are correct
before running.
● No parameter should be beyond the setting limit in the
manual.
6）Operation
Warning ● Only qualified operators can operate the system.

● Ensure the switch is OFF before connecting the power supply.
Warning ● The operator can not leave the system to work alone.
● Make sure the connection is correct before Power On.
● The emergency stop button should be able to cut off all power
supplies when the system breaks down. Do not switch on/off
the system frequently.
Warning ● Prevent the system from environmental interference.
7）Troubleshooting
Caution ● Unqualified persons cannot repair the system.
Warning ● After an alarm occurs, do not restart the system until the
breakdown is fixed.
VI
Ⅲ Safety and precautions for programming
1) Coordinate system
Incorrect coordinate system may cause the machine not to work as expected
even if the instruction is correct, which may injure the operator, and damage the
machine as well as its tool and workpiece.
2) G00 rapid traverse

G00 rapid traverse performs nonlinear motion between its starting point and
end point. Make sure that the path for the tool is safe before G00 rapid traverse
starts, otherwise the tool, the machine and the workpiece may be damaged, and
even the operator injured.
3) Use of this manual

This manual introduces in details all functions of the system, including optional
functions and max. controllable ranges, which are subject to change with the
machine. Therefore, some functions described in this manual may not be
applicable to a specific machine tool. If there is any doubt, please read the
instruction for the machine.
4) Functions of the CNC and machine tool

The functions of CNC machines not only depend on CNC systems, but also
power voltage cabinets, servo systems, CNC and the operator panels. It is hard to
explain all the integrated functions, programming and operation. Do not use
integrated instructions not included in the manual until they have been tested
successfully.
VII
Ⅳ Precautions and warnings for operation
1） Before machining a part
First check whether the machine tool works normally. Make sure that the
machine tool works normally by means of trial run before machining, with no
workpiece and tool mounted on the machine tool.
2） Before operating the machine tool
Check the input data of the system carefully before operating the machine.
Incorrect input data may cause the machine to work improperly, and thus damage
the workpiece and the tool, as well injure the operator.
3) Make sure the system input feedrate is suitable for the expected operation.
In general, there is a maximum feedrate for each machine tool. The proper
feedrate varies with different operations. Please refer to the user manual to
determine the maximum feedrate. If the user doest not operate the machine tool at
a proper speed, the machine tool may work incorrectly, thus causing damage to
the workpiece or the machine tool itself, or even cause personal injury.
4） Compensation function
When tool compensation is needed, check the direction and the amount of the
compensation. Improper compensation causes the machine to work wrongly, so
as to damage the workpiece and the tool, as well injure the operator.
5） Manual operation
If the machine is to run in Manual Mode, check the current position of the tool
and the workpiece, and correctly specify the moving axis, moving direction and the
feedrate. During MPG feed, rotating the MPG (previously called electronic
handwheel) with a large override, such as 100%, causes the tool and worktable to
move rapidly. In such a case, the tool and worktable will not stop immediately even
when the MPG is not rotated. Therefore, MPG movement with a large override may
cause damage to the tool or machine, or even injury to the operator.
6） Manual reference point return
VIII
If manual reference point return is required, make sure that the machine has
been equipped with the detecting element for the reference point. If the manual
reference point return is performed without installing the detecting element, the tool
keeps moving until it hits the stroke limit, which may cause damage to the machine,
workpiece and tool, or even injury to the operator.
IX
Safety responsibility
Manufacturer Responsibility
——Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated on the design
and configuration of the provided CNC systems
——Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC and its accessories
——Be responsible for the provided information and advice
User Responsibility
——Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system operation
procedures and familiar with the safety operation.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding, changing or
modifying the original CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the danger caused by failing to observe the
operation, maintenance, installation and storage in the manual.
This user manual shall be kept by the end user.
Thank you for your support when you are using the products
of Guangzhou CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
X
Contents
Ⅰ OPERATION
introduces the operation methods, technical specifications and
parameter setting for GSK928TD turning machine CNC system.
Ⅱ PROGRAMMING
introduces the instruction codes and program formats of the CNC
system.
Ⅲ Connection
introduces the installation and connection of the CNC system.
Ⅳ Appendix
introduces the supplementary explanations for the installation and
connection of the CNC system.
XI
XII
Contents
CONTENTS
OPERATION ·································································································································3
CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW···············································································································3
CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ············································································5
2.1 928TD Technical Specifications ··········································································································· 5
CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL ·························································································7
3.1 LCD························································································································································· 7
3.2 LED Status Indicator ····························································································································· 7
3.3 Keyboard ················································································································································ 7
3.3.1 Character Key································································································································· 7
3.3.2 Operation Mode Select Key ·········································································································· 8
3.3.3 Function Key··································································································································· 8
3.3.4 Cycle Start Key and Cycle Pause Key (Feed Hold key) ···························································· 9
3.3.5 Manual Axis Control Key ··············································································································· 9
3.3.6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key ··································································································· 10
3.3.7 Edit Key········································································································································· 11
3.3.8 Reset Key ····································································································································· 12
CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION ······················································································13
4.1 System Power-on, Power-off, Initial State, Modal State, and Safety Protection ·························· 13
4.1.1 Power On ······································································································································ 13
4.1.2 Power Off ······································································································································ 14
4.1.3 Initial State and Modal State of System and Program······························································ 14
4.1.3.1 Initial State and Modal State of System·············································································· 14
4.1.3.2 Initial State and Modal State of Program············································································ 15
4.1.4 Safety Protection·························································································································· 15
4.1.4.1 Hard Limit Protection············································································································ 15
4.1.4.2 Soft Limit Protection ············································································································· 16
4.1.4.3 Emergency Stop Alarm (Stopping System Emergently) ··················································· 17
4.1.4.4 Drive Unit Alarm ···················································································································· 19
4.1.4.5 Other Alarms ························································································································· 19
4.1.4.6 Power Off······························································································································· 20
4.1.4.7 Reset Operation···················································································································· 20
4.2 Operation Mode Selection for CNC System····················································································· 21
4.3 Edit Operation Mode ··························································································································· 21
4.3.1 Part Program Directory Search ·································································································· 22
4.3.2 Selecting, Creating, Deleting, Renaming and Copying a Part Program ································ 23
4.3.2.1 Selecting and Creating a Part Program ············································································· 23
4.3.2.2 Deleting a Part Program ······································································································ 24
4.3.2.3 Deleting All Part Programs··································································································· 24
4.3.2.4 Renaming a Part Program ··································································································· 24
4.3.2.5 Copying a Part Program ········································································································· 25
4.3.3 Part Program Communication ···································································································· 25
4.3.3.1 Sending Part Program (CNC→PC, CNC→USB, CNC→CNC) ······································· 25
4.3.3.2 Receiving Part Programs (PC→CNC, USB→CNC, CNC→CNC) ·································· 26
4.3.3.3 Standard Format of TXT Part Program on PC··································································· 27
4.3.4 Inputting and Editing the Contents of Part Program································································· 28
4.3.4.1 Inputting Program Contents································································································· 31
4.3.4.2 Inserting a Block ··················································································································· 32
4.3.4.3 Deleting a Block ···················································································································· 32
4.3.4.4 Inserting a Character in a Block ·························································································· 33
4.3.4.5 Deleting a Character in a Block··························································································· 33
4.3.4.6 Altering Contents of a Block ································································································ 33
4.3.4.7 Inserting a Macro String ······································································································· 34
4.3.4.8 Storage Capacity for Programs ··························································································· 34
4.3.4.9 Operating No. 253 Program ································································································ 34
4.3.4.10 Operating No. 254 program······························································································· 35
XIII
4.3.5 Function of hp5 Key···················································································································35

4.3.5.1 Help for Part Program Command························································································35
4.3.5.2 Help for Obtaining Relative Parameters of Arc ··································································36
4.3.5.3 Rearrangement of Program Line Numbers ········································································37
4.3.5.4 Replacement of Strings ········································································································37
4.3.5.5 Cursor Position ······················································································································37
4.3.5.6 Cursor Movement by MPG···································································································37
4.3.6 Compiling a Part Program ···········································································································38
4.3.6.1 hp3 Compiling Command·····································································································38
4.3.6.2 Result Analysis of Program Compilation ············································································38
4.3.6.3 Prompts of Program Compound Check··············································································39
4.4 JOG Operation Mode ··························································································································40
4.4.1 Coordinate Axis Movement··········································································································42
4.4.1.1 JOG movement ·····················································································································42
4.4.1.2 Step Movement······················································································································42
4.4.1.3 MPG Control Movement ·······································································································43
4.4.1.4 Selecting Rapid Traverse Rate ····························································································44
4.4.1.5 Selecting Speed for Low-speed Feed·················································································45
4.4.1.6 Inputting a Word to Move, Setting Feedrate ······································································45
4.4.1.7 Drive Unit Enabling Control··································································································47
4.4.1.8 Alarm Prompts for Coordinate Axis Movement ··································································47
4.4.2 Establishing a Coordinate System······························································································48
4.4.2.1 Establishing Machine Coordinate System—Machine Zero Return (Machine Reference
Point Return) ·········································································································································48
4.4.2.2 Establishing Machine Coordinate System— without Machine Zero (No Machine
Reference Point) ···································································································································50
4.4.2.3 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System ···············································································50
4.4.2.4 Setting Program Reference Point························································································52
4.4.2.5 Program Reference Point Return ························································································52
4.4.2.6 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point ···················53
4.4.3 Spindle Control Function··············································································································53
4.4.3.1 Spindle Start/Stop Control ····································································································53
4.4.3.2 Spindle S Command – Gear Shift Control··········································································55
4.4.3.3 Spindle S Command— Rotating Speed Control ································································56
4.4.4 Coolant Control·····························································································································59
4.4.5 Manual Tool Change Control·······································································································59
4.4.6 Manual Tool Change ····················································································································61
4.4.7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function ······························································································65
4.4.8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function ··························································································67
4.4.9 Other Option Functions················································································································69
4.4.9.1 Triple-color Indicator Control································································································69
4.4.9.2 Lubricant Control ···················································································································70
4.4.9.3 Machine Electricity Delay Power-on Control ······································································70
4.4.9.4 Safety Door Detection Function ··························································································70
4.4.9.5 Low-pressure Detection Function························································································71
4.4.10 Viewing Operation Information in Manual Mode ·····································································71
4.4.11 Appendix Table····························································································································71
4.4.11.1 List of M function Commands Controlled by MDI Input···················································71
4.5 Auto Operation Mode ··························································································································73
4.5.1 System Working States in Auto Operation Mode ······································································74
4.5.2 Explanations for Function Key Operation in Auto Operation Mode ········································74
4.5.2.1 Switching between Single and Continuous Operation ······················································74
4.5.2.2 Switching bewteen Dry Run and Machining Run ······························································75
4.5.2.3 Switching between Coordinate Display and Graph Display ·············································76
4.5.2.4 Starting Execution from First Block of Program ·································································76
4.5.2.5 Starting Execution from a Specified Block··········································································76
4.5.3 Display during Program Execution ·····························································································77
4.5.3.1 Definition of Graph Display Data ·························································································77
4.5.3.2 Inputting Graph Display Data·······························································································78
4.5.3.3 Part Count and Timing ··········································································································79
4.5.4 Manual Operation for Machine Auxiliary Functions ··································································80
4.5.5 Speed Override Adjustment in Auto Operation Mode·······························································80
4.5.5.1 Speed Override Adjustment ·································································································80
XIV
Contents
4.5.5.2 MPG Speed Control·············································································································· 81

4.5.6 Interruption Operation during Program Execution···································································· 82
4.5.6.1 Interruption with Keys during Program Execution····························································· 82
4.5.6.2 External feed/Spindle hold Knob························································································· 83
4.5.6.3 External Start and Pause Signals ······················································································· 84
4.5.6.4 Feeding Device Alarm Function ·························································································· 84
4.5.7 Modifying Tool Offset during Program Execution ····································································· 84
4.5.7.1 Methods of Modifying Tool Offsets during Program Execution ········································ 84
4.5.7.2 Modifying Validity of Tool Offsets during Program Execution··········································· 85
4.5.8 Viewing Running Information in AUTO Operation Mode ························································· 85
4.5.9 Return to Program Reference Point in AUTO Operation Mode ·············································· 87
4.5.10 System Reset Key and Emergency Stop Signal Processing in Auto Mode ························ 87
4.5.11 Adjusting Brightness of LCD screen in AUTO, MANUAL Operation Mode·························· 87
4.5.12 Displaying Executing States of M Commands in Auto, Manual Operation Mode ··············· 88
4.5.13 Additional Operation in Auto Operation Mode ········································································ 88
4.6 Parameter Operation Mode················································································································ 89
4.6.1 Parameter Overview ···················································································································· 90
4.6.1.1 Parameter Authority·············································································································· 90
4.6.1.2 Entering an Operation Level································································································ 90
4.6.1.3 Parameter Management ······································································································ 90
4.6.2 Modifying Parameters·················································································································· 92
4.6.2.1 Searching Parameters ········································································································· 92
4.6.2.2 Modifying Parameters ·········································································································· 92
4.6.3 Parameter hp6 Function·············································································································· 93
4.6.3.1 Parameter Communication and Standard Format ···························································· 93
4.6.3.2 Parameter Extraction and Solidification ············································································· 96
4.6.3.3 System Software Upgrade and Internal Memory Update················································· 97
4.6.3.4 Function Command Authority ······························································································ 98
4.6.4 Description of Parameters··········································································································· 98
4.6.4.1 Parameters of Reference Point, Soft Limit __ P000～P020 ············································ 98
4.6.4.2 Parameters of Zero Return Function__ P021～P026, P109～P111, P406～P407······· 99
4.6.4.3 Parameters of Movement Speed and Acceleration Time __P100～P108, P112～P119
······························································································································································ 101
4.6.4.4 Parameters of Drive and Compensation P200～P209, P411, P1000～P1905············ 103
4.6.4.5 Parameters of Spindle and Coolant __ P300～P317, P326, P329, P341, P410········· 106
4.6.4.6 Parameters of Tool Post __ P318～P325, P408 ····························································· 109
4.6.4.7 Parameters of Chuck and Tailstock __ P327～P328, P409··········································· 112
4.6.4.8 Bit Parameters of Running and Efficiency__ P400～P401 ············································ 113
4.6.4.9 Relationship between Path and Parameters of Running and Efficiency ······················ 115
4.6.4.10 Bit Parameters of Safety and Debugging__ P402～P404, P419 ································ 116
4.6.4.11 Bit Parameter of Motor Driver__ P405 ··········································································· 121
4.6.4.12 Parameters of Other Interfaces__ P412, P330～P332 ············································· 121
4.6.4.13 Other Parameters__ P413～P416, P333 ······································································ 123
4.6.4.14 Parameters of Interface __P500～P556 ········································································ 126
4.6.4.15 Initial Values of Variables __P600～P639······································································ 127
4.6.4.16 Parameters of G76 __P336～P339················································································ 127
4.6.5 Appendix Parameter List ········································································································ 128
4.6.5.1 Reference Parameter List·································································································· 128
4.6.5.2 Motion Parameter List ········································································································ 129
4.6.5.3 Drive Parameter List··········································································································· 130
4.6.5.4 Auxiliary Parameter List ····································································································· 130
4.6.5.5 Bit Parameter List ··············································································································· 131
4.6.5.6 Interface Parameter List····································································································· 132
4.6.5.7 Variable Initial Value List ···································································································· 133
4.6.5.8 Pitch Error Compensation Parameter List ······································································· 134
4.6.5.9 List of Parameters Relative to Command Disabling ······················································· 134
4.6.5.10 List of Parameters Relative to Output Interface Releasing·········································· 135
4.6.5.11 List of Parameters Related to Input Interface Releasing·············································· 135
4.7 Tool Offset Operation Mode ············································································································· 137
4.7.1 Searching Tool Offset Value······································································································ 138
4.7.2 Inputting Tool Offset Data from Keyboard ··············································································· 138
XV
4.7.3 Clearing Offset Values of Each Group ·····················································································139

4.7.4 Tool Compensation hp6 Function ·····························································································139
4.7.4.1 Communication and Standard Format of Tool Offset Data ·············································140
4.7.4.2 Tool Compensation Data Clearing·····················································································141
4.8 Diagnosis Operation Mode ···············································································································142
4.8.1 Searching Interface Signal ········································································································142
4.8.2 Explanations for Display of Interface Signals Names·····························································143
4.8.3 Explanation of Input Interface Diagnosis ·················································································143
4.8.4 Explanation of Output Interface Diagnosis ··············································································143
4.8.5 Output Interface Operation Function ························································································144
4.8.6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Detection·······································································144
4.8.7 Diagnosis hp6 Function ·············································································································144
4.8.7.1 Display of Alarm Record ·····································································································145
4.8.7.2 Searching Alarm Record·····································································································146
4.8.7.3 Alarm Record hp6 Function ·······························································································147
4.8.8 Machine Auxiliary Function Control ··························································································148
CHAPTER FIVE RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION ········································· 149
5.1 RS232 Communication ·····················································································································149
5.1.1 Communication between CNC and PC····················································································149
5.1.2 Communication between CNC and CNC·················································································150
5.2 USB Communication ·························································································································150
5.2.1 USB Operation····························································································································151
5.2.2 USB File Directory Requirements·····························································································151
PROGRAMMING ····················································································································· 155
CHAPTER ONE PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL································································ 155
1.1 Coordinate Axis and Its Direction ·····································································································155
1.2 Machine Coordinate System, Machine Zero···················································································156
1.3 Program Reference Point ·················································································································156
1.4 Machine 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point ··················································································156
1.5 Workpiece Coordinate System·········································································································156
1.6 Programming Coordinate··················································································································157
1.6.1 Absolute Coordinate Values ······································································································157
1.6.2 Relative Coordinate Values ·······································································································157
1.6.3 Compound Coordinate Values ··································································································158
1.7 Diameter Programming and Radius Programming ········································································158
1.8 Interpolation Function························································································································158
CHAPTER 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ·············································································· 160
2.1 Character ············································································································································160
2.2 Word ····················································································································································160
2.3 Block Number·····································································································································161
2.4 Block····················································································································································161
2.5 Block Skip Symbol and Comment····································································································162
2.6 Program Structure······························································································································163
CHAPTER 3 MSTF COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS ······························································· 164
3.1 M — Auxiliary Function (Command List)·························································································164
3.1.1 M00 — Pause ·····························································································································165
3.1.2 M02 — End of Program ·············································································································165
3.1.3 M20 — Program End Cycle Machining····················································································165
3.1.4 M30 — End of Program, Spindle OFF, Cooling OFF······························································166
3.1.5 M03, M04, M05 —Spindle Control····························································································166
3.1.6 M08, M09 —Coolant Control·····································································································166
3.1.7 M10，M11, M12 — Clamping/Releasing Chuck, Cancelling Chuck Output Signal············167
3.1.8 M32, M33 — Lubricating ON/OFF····························································································167
3.1.9 M41, M42, M44, M43 — Spindle Automatic Gear Shift Control ············································167
3.1.10 M78, M79, M80 —Tailstock Advancing and Retracting, Tailstock Output Signal Cancelling
··································································································································································168
3.1.11 M96 —Calling Cycle Execution·······························································································168
3.1.12 M97 — Program Transfer ········································································································169
3.1.13 M98, M99 — Subprogram Call and Subprogram Return·····················································169
XVI
Contents
3.1.14 M21, M22, M23, M24 —User Output Control ······································································· 171
3.1.15 M91, M92, M93, M94 — User Input Control ········································································· 171
3.1.16 M60~M74 — Custom Command ··························································································· 172
3.2 M81, M82, M83—User Input/Output Condition Control ································································ 172
3.2.1 M82— Output Control and Detection······················································································· 173
3.2.2 M81—Control According to Input Signal State········································································ 173
3.2.3 M83—Control According to Output Signal State····································································· 174
3.3 S function — Spindle Function········································································································· 174
3.3.1 Spindle Motor Controlled by Gear Shift ··················································································· 174
3.3.2 Variable-frequency Motor Controlled by Speed ······································································ 175
3.4 T Function — Tool Function ············································································································· 176
3.4.1 Tool Offset Execution Mode-Moving Slide Carriage······························································· 176
3.4.2 Tool Offset Execution Mode- Modifying Coordinates ····························································· 177
3.5 F Function — Feedrate Function ······························································································· 177
CHAPTER FOUR G COMMANDS AND FUNCTIONS·······························································180
4.1 G00 — Rapid Positioning G00········································································································· 180
4.2 G01 — Linear Interpolation ·············································································································· 182
4.3 G02, G03, G05 —Circular Interpolation·························································································· 183
4.4 Thread Cutting Command ················································································································ 188
4.4.1 G33 — Thread Cutting ·············································································································· 188
4.5 G32 —Tapping Cycle ························································································································ 196
4.6 G50 — Setting Workpiece Coordinate System·············································································· 197
4.7 G51 — Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System Setting ························································· 198
4.8 G26 — X, Z Reference Point Return······························································································· 199
4.9 G28 — Return to Machine Zero (Machine Reference Point) ······················································· 200
4.10 G30 — 2nd, 3rd Program Reference Point Return ········································································ 201
4.11 G04 — Timing Delay ······················································································································· 201
4.12 G96 —Constant Surface Speed Control, G97 —Constant Surface Speed Cancel ················· 202
4.13 Single Canned Cycle ······················································································································ 205
4.13.1 G90 —Outer Cylinder Face Turning Cycle (Axial Cutting Cycle) ······································· 205
4.13.2 G92 —Thread Cutting Cycle ·································································································· 208
4.13.3 G94 — Inner/outer End (Taper) Face Turning Cycle ··························································· 216
4.13.4 G74 —End Face Deep Hole Machining Cycle ····································································· 219
4.13.5 G75 —Grooving Cycle ············································································································ 221
4.14 Compound Cycle····························································································································· 223
4.14.1 G71 —Axial Plane Rough and Finish Command Group ····················································· 223
4.14.2 G72 —End Face Roughing/Finishing Command Group ····················································· 228
4.14.3 G73 — Closed-loop Cutting Cycle Command Group ·························································· 232
4.14.4 G76 —Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle ·········································································· 236
4.15 G22, G80 —Program Local Cycle································································································· 241
4.16 G98 — Feed per Minute, G99 — Feed per Revolution ······························································ 243
4.17 G31 — Skip Function······················································································································ 244
4.18 G66 -Memorizing Current Coordinates, G67-Return to Memorized Coordinates···················· 246
4.19 Appendix: G function and Its Explanation Table (Table 4-3)······················································· 246
4.20 Appendix：G and Its Relative Parameter Explanation (Table 4-4)············································ 248
CHAPTER FIVE GENERAL PROGRAMMING RULES AND EXAMPLES ···························249
5.1 General Programming Rules············································································································ 249
5.2 Programming Rules for Commands in One Block········································································· 250
5.3 Command Execution Sequence ······································································································ 251
5.4 Programming Example ····················································································································· 253
5.4.1 Outer Machining Example········································································································· 253
5.4.2 Thread Machining Example ······································································································ 254
5.4.3 Compound Machining Example ······························································································· 257
CHAPTER SIX ALARM MESSAGE·······························································································261
6.1 Emergency Stop Alarm ····················································································································· 261
6.2 Alarm Table in PARAMETER, OFFSET Operation Mode (i.e. E001~E009)······························· 261
6.3 Table of Alarm in Edit Operation Mode(i.e. E100~ E199) ····························································· 263
6.4 Table of Alarms Relative to Program (i.e.E200~ E299, E600~ E699) ········································· 265
6.4.1 Alarm in Program Command (i.e. E200~299)········································································· 265
6.4.2 Alarm in Program Comprehensive Check Alarm (E600~E699)············································ 268
6.5 Table of Alarm in JOG or AUTO Operation Mode (i.e. E300~ E499)··········································· 270
XVII
6.5.1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations (i.e. E300~E399) ····················································270

6.5.2 Relative Alarm in Executing Statement (E400~ E499) ···························································274
CHAPTER SEVEN STATEMENT PROGRAMMING (not for GSK928TD)··························· 276
7.1 Variable ···············································································································································276
7.1.1 Variable Expression Method······································································································276
7.1.2 Classification of Variable············································································································276
7.1.2.1 Command Variable··············································································································277
7.1.2.2 Pointer Variable ···················································································································279
7.1.2.3 Interface Variable ················································································································280
7.1.2.4 Keyboard Scan Register r5001··························································································281
7.1.2.5 Display Window Register r5002 ························································································282
7.1.2.6 Display Value Register r5003·····························································································285
7.1.2.7 Graph Refresh Register r5004···························································································285
7.1.2.8 Program Control Register r5008························································································286
7.1.2.9 System Special Variable Group 1 ······················································································287
7.1.2.10 System Special Variable Group 2····················································································288
7.2 Statement············································································································································289
7.2.1 Assignment Statement ···········································································································289
7.2.2 Conditional Statement············································································································290
7.2.3 Statement Program Example ································································································290
7.3 Process Monitoring and Execution ··································································································292
7.3.1 Process Monitor Description (r7000)····················································································292
7.3.2 Process Monitor ON/OFF ······································································································293
7.3.3 Monitor Program Example·····································································································295
7.3.4 Pulse Monitoring (r7100) ·······································································································297
7.3.5 Pulse Monitoring Programming Example ············································································298
7.3.6 Variable Transfer Register (r7900) ·······················································································299
7.4 Attached List·······································································································································300
7.4.1 ASCII List·································································································································300
7.4.2 Corresponding List between Common Colors and Code Values······································300
CHAPTER EIGHT CUSTOMIZED COMMAND PROGRAMMING·········································· 301
8.1 Customized Command······················································································································301
8.1.1 Programming Format of Customized Command ····································································301
8.2 Customized Command Library (P254) ····························································································301
8.2.1 Programming Format and Debugging of Customized Command Library ····························302
8.2.2 Use of Customized Command Library ·····················································································302
8.3. Foot Switch of M61 command·········································································································303
CONNECTION·························································································································· 307
CHAPTER ONE INTERFACE OVERVIEW·················································································· 307
1.1 Rear Cover Interface Layout ············································································································307
1.2 Overall Frame·····································································································································308
CHAPTER TWO INTERFACE TABLE·························································································· 309
CHAPTER THREE CNC DEVICE CONNECTION ······································································311
3.1 Communication Interface ·················································································································· 311
3.1.1 USB Interface······························································································································ 311
3.2 X1, X2 Interface ································································································································· 311
3.2.1 X1, X2 Interface Signal Definition ····························································································· 311
3.2.2 Connection Method of Input Signal ··························································································314
3.2.3 Connection Method of Output Signal ·······················································································316
3.2.4 Input/Output Signal Specification······························································································318
3.3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection·············································································318
3.4 Tool Change Control Function and Connection··············································································321
3.4.1 Definition of Tool Change Control Signal ·················································································321
3.4.2 Signal Connection ······················································································································321
3.4.3 Function Description ··················································································································321
3.4.3.1 Tool Change Mode 0···········································································································322
3.4.3.2 Tool Change Mode 1···········································································································322
3.4.3.3 Tool Change Mode 2···········································································································323
3.4.3.4 Tool Change Mode 3···········································································································323
XVIII
Contents
3.4.3.5 Tool Change Mode 4 ·········································································································· 325

3.4.4 Tool Signal Check and Parameter Setting ·············································································· 326
3.4.4.1 Default mode (P408_d7=0) ······························································································· 326
3.4.4.2 Table Checking Mode········································································································· 327
3.5 X3 Motor Interface····························································································································· 328
3.5.1 Signal Definition ························································································································· 328
3.5.2 Technical Specifications ············································································································ 329
3.5.3 Equivalent Circuit ······················································································································· 329
3.5.3.1 Drive Unit Alarm Signal Xalm, Zalm ················································································· 329
3.5.3.2 Enable Signal Xen, Zen ····································································································· 330
3.5.3.3 Pulse Signal and Direction Signal····················································································· 330
3.5.4 Connection between CNC System and Drive Unit of Compound Stepper Motor ··············· 330
3.5.5 Connection between CNC and Drive Unit of Reaction Stepper Motor································· 333
3.5.6 Connection between CNC and AC Servo Drive Unit ····························································· 335
3.5.7 Connection Diagram between CNC and Panasonic Drive Unit ············································ 337
3.5.8 Connection Diagram between CNC and Yaskawa Drive Unit··············································· 338
3.6 X4 Spindle Interface·························································································································· 339
3.6.1 Signal Definitions ······················································································································· 339
3.6.2 Converter Technical Specification ···························································································· 339
3.6.3 Encoder Technical Specifications ····························································································· 340
3.6.4 Connection Diagram of Converter Analog Voltage Interface················································· 340
3.6.5 Encoder Interface Principle······································································································· 340
3.6.6 Encode Interface Connection Diagram···················································································· 340
3.7 X5 MPG Interface······························································································································ 341
3.7.1 Signal Definition ························································································································· 341
3.7.2 MPG Interface Principle ············································································································ 341
3.7.3 MPG Interface Connection Diagram ···················································································· 341
CHAPTER FOUR USE AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ···············································342
4.1 Ambient Condition ····························································································································· 342
4.2 Earthing ·············································································································································· 342
4.3 Power Supply Requirements············································································································ 342
4.4 Protection ··········································································································································· 342
4.5 Use after Long-time Unuse ·············································································································· 342
Appendix 1 CNC System Electrical Symbol Explanations ··················································345
Appendix 2 CNC System Tool Post Controller Circuit Method Layout····························346
Appendix 3 Interface Schematic Circuit····················································································347
Appendix 4 External Control Connection Diagram································································350
Appendix 5 GSK928TD CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension·····················351
Appendix 6 GSK928TD-L CNC System Appearance Installation Dimension ·················352
Supplementary Explanation·············································································································353
1. Modified Functions and Commands······················································································353
1.1 Newly-added Interface Parameter P538, P539, P540—Z/X/Y Move Limit································· 353
1.2 Newly-added Interface Parameter P351 — Alarm of Lubrication Check before Machining ····· 353
1.3 G76 Command Modification············································································································· 353
1.4 Diagnosis Operation Mode··············································································································· 354
1.5 AUTO Operation Mode ····················································································································· 354
2. Newly-added M Command: M50—M59, M84········································································354
2.1 Customized Commands Expanded to M50-M74 from M60-M74.················································ 354
2.2 Newly-added Function of Calling M50-M72 before Machining····················································· 354
2.3 M84 — Input Signal Check within a Specified Time ······································································ 355
3. Newly-added G Commands and Functions ·········································································355
3.1 G38 — Rigid Taping, Threading ······································································································ 355
3.2 G21, G20— Metric, Inch Input ········································································································· 357
3.3 Detailed Explanation of Metric/Inch Switch ···················································································· 358
3.3.1 Metric/Inch Switch Parameter······························································································· 358
XIX
XX
Chapter One Overview
Ⅰ
OPERATION
Ⅰ OPERATION
1
Ⅰ
OPERATION
2
Chapter One Overview
OPERATION
CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW
The GSK928TD system employs a 32-bit high performance CPU and a complex
programmable logic device of very-large-scale programmable array integrated circuits
Ⅰ
as its control center, thus realizing the movement control with a μm-level precision.
OPERATION
The product, equipped with a true color LCD with resolution of 480×234, uses the
international standard NC language, also known as ISO codes, to write part programs.
It is characterized by the full-screen program editing, Chinese/English operation
interface, real-time track and display of the part graph and simple operation as well as
the high cost performance. It can be matched with stepper motors or AC servo drive
units, and by means of programming, it is capable of machining outer cylinders, end
faces, grooves, tapers, circular arcs, threads, etc.
Technical specifications
9 Link axes: 2 (X, Z axes), short linear smooth interpolation at a high speed realizable;
Interpolation precision: 0.001mm, max. rapid traverse: 15m/min
9 Flexible and convenient programming
9 USB interface communication, fast and easy to operate
9 Least command increment: 0.001mm, electronic gear ratio:（1～99999）/（1～99999）
9 Realizing controls like automatic tool post, spindle automatic gear shift.
9 Backlash compensation, tool length compensation
9 Exponential acceleration/deceleration control, applicable to high-speed and high-precision
machining
9 Tapping function
9 Available to cut inch/metric thread, end face thread, continuous thread; with thread high-speed
run-out
9 Full-screen part program editing, capable of storing 255 programs; a capacity of 4 MB for No.
253 program
9 True color LCD with a large screen, color profiles selected by parameters
9 Real-time tracking and display of MSTF status during processing
9 Multi-level passwords, convenient for equipment management
9 Parameter backup function
9 Communication of parameters and tool compensation data
9 Support for two-way communication between CNC and CNC, and between CNC and PC; CNC
software upgraded through a serial port
9 Support for two-way communication between CNC and USB; CNC software upgraded through
USB
3
9 Installation dimension, electrical characteristics and part of interfaces compatible with

GSK928TC turning machine NC system
Note
1. Neither the parameters nor the functions of Y axis described in this manual are valid.
2. The interface RS232 of the system has not been led out; to lead it out from the inside of the
system, special tools and professional technician are required.
Ⅰ
OPERATION
4
Chapter Two Technical Specification
CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.1 928TD Technical Specifications

Simultaneously controlled axes (interpolation axes): 2 (X, Y axes)
Interpolation function: linear, circular, and thread interpolation of X and Z axes
Position command range: -9999.999 mm～9999.999mm; least command increment: 0.001mm
Ⅰ
Electronic gear: Command multiplier coefficient 1～99999, command division coefficient 1～99999
Rapid traverse rate: Max. 15000mm/min; rapid override: F25%, 50%, 75%, 100% four-level real time
OPERATION
adjustment
Motion control Cutting feedrate: Max. 4000mm/min; feedrate override: 16-level real time adjustment from 0～150%
(increment 10%)
Manual feedrate: 0mm/min～1260mm/min 16-level real time adjustment, or user-defined speed in
real time
MPG feed: Three gears, 0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.1mm
Acceleration/deceleration: Either exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration can be selected for
cutting feed.
G codes: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, (G22/G80), G26, G28, G30, G31, G32, G33, G50, G51,
G codes
G66, G67, G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, G90, G92, G94, G96, G97, G98, G99
Capable of machining single /multiple metric/inch straight thread, taper thread and end face thread;
Thread run-out length, angle and speed characteristics settable, with high-speed run-out processing;
Thread
thread pitch: 0.001mm～500mm or 0.06 teeth/inch ~ 25400 teeth/inch; taping function available
machining
Spindle encoder: Setting range of encoder lines: 100 p/r～5000p/r; drive ratio between encoder and
spindle: 1：1
Backlash compensation: 0 mm～10.000mm
Precision Tool compensation: 16 tool numbers, 64 groups of tool length compensations
compensation Tool setting mode: Trial tool setting, fixed point tool setting; Tool compensation execution mode: tool
compensation executed by modifying coordinates, tool compensation executed by moving tool post
M00, M02, M20, M30, M03, M04, M05, M08, M09, M10, M11, M12, M32, M33, M41, M42, M43, M44,
M codes M78, M79, M80, M81, M82, M83, M96, M97, M98, M99, M91, M92, M93, M94, M21, M22, M23,
M24；user defined M codes：M60～M74；
Up to 16 tool numbers (T01□□～T16□□), control process of tool change is selected by setting tool
T codes
post type parameters; tool post type is set to 0 when using a line-up tool.
Speed switch value control mode: The output range of S command 4-gear direct control is S01～
S04; or the output range of the 16-gear BCD code is S00～S15.
Spindle speed Speed analog voltage control mode: S commands specify the spindle speed per minute or cutting
control linear speed (constant surface speed control); the CNC outputs 0V～10V voltage to the spindle
frequency converter; spindle stepless speed variation; support for 4 spindle mechanical gears M41～
M44
I/O function diagnosis display
I/O function
I/O interface: 23 points input/18 points output
Display: 480×234 lattice true color LCD, with LED or CCFL backlight
Display
Display mode: Chinese or English display interface set by parameters; real-time display of machining
interface
path
Program number: up to 255 programs, program storage capacity: 4400KB
Program edit Edit mode: Full-screen editing, support for incremental/absolute coordinate mixed programming,
program calling, and subprogram multi-level nesting
5
With USB interface; bidirectional transmission of programs, parameters and tool compensations
Communication
between CNC and USB; support for system software upgrade by USB download
Adaptive driver GSK DA98 series digital AC servo or DY3 series step drive device, with pulse + direction signal input
Ⅰ
OPERATION
6
Chapter Three Operation Panel
CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL
This turning machine CNC system (abbreviated to system or CNC) employs an operation
panel made from aluminum alloy.
Ⅰ
3.1 LCD
OPERATION
LCD: Human-machine interface, with resolution of 480×234, lattice true color LCD
3.2 LED Status Indicator
LED indicators are used to indicate the current working states of the system. There are 15 function
keys with a LED indicator. When the indicator lights up, the corresponding function of the key is enabled;
when it goes out, the function is disabled.
3.3 Keyboard
According to the standard of GSK, the function keys with the visible signs below are designed for
the system. The corresponding function of a function key is enabled when it is pressed. The meaning of
each key is as follows:
3.3.1 Character Key
Character keys consist of numbers, letters and some signs.

In the Edit mode, each letter key can switches between two or three keycodes; in other modes, each
letter key only indicates one keycode. (E.g. Though I and P are on the same key, the system will
automatically identify the keycode (I or P) to be used after pressing this key.)
Numeric key: Inputs data (0 ~9)
Letter key: Inputs letters
Sign key: Inputs signs such as + (plus sign), - (minus sign), * (multiplication sign), / (division sign) , +
(positive sign), - (negative sign), . (decimal point), ＞ (is greater than), = (is equal to), ＜
(is less than), and, or, as well as ( ).
7
3.3.2 Operation Mode Select Key
The keys are identified by a sign and letters. The user can finish the corresponding function by
pressing an operation mode select key. The meaning of each key is as follows:
selects Edit operation mode

Ⅰ
selects Manual operation mode

OPERATION
selects AUTO operation mode
selects Parameter operation mode
selects Tool Offset operation mode
selects Diagnosis operation mode
3.3.3 Function Key
The keys are indicated by a sign and letters. With a function key pressed, its function is enabled. The
meaning of each key is as follows:
Rapid override increase increases the rapid traverse override in MANUAL operation
mode, and increases the speed override of G00 command in AUTO operation mode.
Rapid override decrease decreases the rapid traverse override in MANUAL operation
mode, and decreases the speed override of G00 command in AUTO operation mode.
Feedrate override increase increases the feedrate override in MANUAL operation mode,
and increases the speed override of G01 command in AUTO operation mode.
Feedrate override decrease decreases the feedrate override in MANUL operation mode,
and decreases the speed override of G01 command in AUTO operation mode.
X axis reference point return is only valid in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode. (In this
manual, the program reference point is also called the program zero point)
8
Z axis program reference point return is only valid in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode.
X axis machine reference point return only valid in MANUAL operation mode (In this
manual, the machine reference point is also called the machine zero point).
Ⅰ
OPERATION
Z axis machine reference point return only valid in MANUL operation mode.
Dry run key When Dry Run is selected in AUTO operation mode to execute commands,
whether M, S, T commands are valid is determined by bit parameter P401_d7. After the Dry
Run state is exited, the coordinate of each axis of the system automatically resumes to the
one before Dry Run.
Single/Continuous key selects Single/Continuous mode in AUTO operation mode; in

other operations, it is for the hp function.
3.3.4 Cycle Start Key and Cycle Pause Key (Feed Hold key)
In AUTO operation mode, they are respectively used to start and suspend the program execution. The
meaning of each key is as follows:
Cycle Start key starts the program in AUTO operation mode, and then the program is
executed automatically; moves the coordinate axis in MANUAL operation mode.
Cycle Pause key (Feed Hold key) suspends the execution in MANUAL or AUTO
operation mode; in other operation modes, it means the hp function.
【Note】
There are two letters “hp” (help) on the upper right corners of some keys. In total, there
are 7 Help keys, which are hp0～hp6; in different operation modes, when the main key is
invalid, the hp is valid.
3.3.5 Manual Axis Control Key
In MANUAL operation mode, the meanings of manual axis control keys are as follows:
9
In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in negative direction.
In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in positive direction.
In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in negative direction.

Ⅰ
In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in positive direction.

OPERATION
RAPID/FEED key In MANUAL operation mode, it switches between rapid traverse rate and
feedrate.
In MANUAL operation mode, it is Single Step/MPG Step Width Selection; in other

operation modes, it is the hp function.
In MANUAL operation mode, it is MPG control selection and axis selection; in other
In MANUAL operation mode, it is Z/Y axis selection, which is invalid for 928TD; in other
Step/JOG key It selects Step/JOG operation in MANUAL operation mode.
3.3.6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key
The keys below are used for controlling and completing a variety of auxiliary functions of the machine
tool. The meaning of each key is as follows:
Spindle CW rotation The spindle rotates in CW direction (viewed from the tailstock to the
chuck)
Spindle stop The spindle stops rotating.
10
Spindle CCW rotation The spindle rotates in CCW direction (viewed from the tailstock to
the chuck)
Coolant control switches between coolant ON/OFF.
Ⅰ
OPERATION
Spindle gear shift selects the speed of each spindle gear for the machine tools equipped
with multi-speed spindle motors and control circuits.
Tool change key selects the next tool whose tool number is adjacent to the current one.
3.3.7 Edit Key
Key Designation Function
Press this key for confirmation after input.

ENTER key
INPUT key Input the desired contents
In Edit operation, press it to switch between word

ALTER key insertion/alternation;
In other operations, it has specific meanings.
In Edit operation mode, press it to delete words, blocks or a

DELETE key whole program.
In other operations, it has specific meanings.
Press it to cancel the current input data, or exit the operation
ESCAPE
state;
key
Press it to quit the current operation or setting.
In AUTO operation mode, it indicates “Dry Run”;

HOME key In EDIT operation mode, it moves the cursor to the beginning
of the current line.
In MANUAL operation, it indicates “STEP”;

END key In EDIT operation, it moves the cursor to the end of the current
line.
11
Key Designation Function
In AUTO operation mode, it means “Single/Continuous”

program execution.
SINGLE
In EDIT operation mode, it means “Single/Continuous” analog
BLOCK key
program execution.
In other operations, it means the hp function.
Ⅰ
In Edit/Parameter/Tool Offset operation mode, they control the

OPERATION
Cursor move movement of the cursor;

h p0 hp 1
keys In other operation modes, they are hp functions or have other
specific meanings.
In Edit/Parameter/Tool Offset operation mode, they are used
Page
to turn pages up and down.
change keys
In Manual/Auto operation, they have specific meanings.
3.3.8 Reset Key
Reset causes the system to enter RESET state.
12
Chapter Four System Operation – Safety Protection
CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION
This chapter describes in detail the operation and precautions of each functional module of the CNC
system. Before operating the machine, please thoroughly read this chapter.
4.1 System Power-on, Power-off, Initial State, Modal State, and Safety Protection
Ⅰ
4.1.1 Power On
OPERATION
There is no power switch on the operation panel of this CNC system. The user may install a power
switch if necessary, so as to prevent the system from electric impact.
Before turning on the system, please confirm that:
1) The machine is in normal status;
2) The voltage of the power supply is in accordance with the requirements;
3) The connection is correct and firm.
The operation procedures for System Power On are as follows:
1) First turn on the power main switch;
Turn on the system power switch, then the system displays the initial screen as shown in fig. 4-1. In
this state, press any key other than key to enable the system to enter EDIT operation mode.
Fig. 4-1 System initial screen
2) The following steps are completed in order after system power on.
z System control program loading
z System self-check and initialization
z System parameter loading and check
z I/O interface initialization
z User program loading and check
【Note】
1) Do not press any key on the operation panel during system power on. If the system enters
the key test interface, please press RESET key to exit.
13
4.1.2 Power Off
The operation procedures for system power off are as follows:

1) Press the system power switch to cut off the power.
2) Turn off the main power switch of the machine.
Before turning off the system, please confirm that:
1) The X and Z axes of the system are at the halted state;
Ⅰ
2) The auxiliary functions (e.g. spindle, cooling) are OFF;

3) The power is cut off.
OPERATION
【Note】
1) In general, if it is the first time that the system is powered on, self-check and
initialization should be performed first.( This procedure is done by the machine tool
builder rather than by the user. Otherwise, the parameters set by the machine tool
builder may be lost. )
2) For the procedures of turning off the power of the machine, please see the user manual
provided by the machine tool builder.
4.1.3 Initial State and Modal State of System and Program
4.1.3.1 Initial State and Modal State of System
The initial state of the system is the specific state to which a function is automatically set upon
system power on; therein, none of the auxiliary functions has actual output.
The modal state of the system is the state that a function remains in after the system executes this
function.
Initial state and modal state of the system:
System state Initial state of the system Modal state
System machine coordinate system Remains in the state of last Keeps until being changed.
Power-On.
System tool nose coordinate system Remains in the state of last Keeps until being changed.
Power-On.
In Auto operation: 30mm/min
Cutting feedrate: F In Manual operation: Remains in Keeps until being changed.
the state of last Power-On
Frequency-conversion spindle speed: S S200 Keeps until being changed
Gear-shift spindle gear: S0
Spindle gear Frequency-conversion spindle Keeps until being changed
gear: M41
Manual slow feed/rapid feed state Slow feed Keeps until being changed
Feedrate override Remains in the state of last Keeps until being changed.
Power-On.
Rapid override Remains in the state of last Keeps until being changed
Power-On.
Spindle state M05 Spindle stop Keeps until being changed
Coolant state M06 coolant OFF Keeps until being changed
Chuck state M11 Chuck release Keeps until being changed
Lubricant state M33 Coolant OFF Keeps until being changed
T tool number state Remains in the state of last Keeps until being changed
Power-On.
Tailstock state M79 Tailstock run-out state Keeps until being changed
14
4.1.3.2 Initial State and Modal State of Program
The initial state of the program is the state automatically set by the system by means of initialization
before a machining program is executed; i.e., the initial default state for the default programming word
and speed word when the system executes the first command of the machining program.
Program initial states of the system are as follows:
G function: G00, G97, G98;
Ⅰ
Cutting speed: 30mm/min;
OPERATION
Auxiliary function: Current state
System coordinates: Current coordinates, which are the ones after the last automatic
program execution or after the last manual operation.
G function modal state means that once a word is set, it keeps unchanged until it is changed by
other G modal commands belonging to the same group. The meaning of the modal state: after a G
command is executed, it is unnecessary to input it again if it needs to be used in the following blocks.
The modal G commands are classified into the following three groups, and in each group, only one
command is in the modal state.
Group 1: G00, G01, G02, G03, G05 (Initial state: G00)
Group 2: G96, G97； (Initial state: G97)
Group 3: G98, G99; (Initial state: G98 F30)
The non-modal commands are only effective in the current block. They must be specified each time
they are used.
【Note】
In AUTO operation mode, when the system executes the first command, or executes the first
command after executing M20, or selects a block between the first lock and the last block as its first
command, it will automatically resumes to the program initial state.
4.1.4 Safety Protection
A series of safety protection is set for the CNC system, so as to protect the operator as well as the
machine tool. (Y axis function is invalid)
4.1.4.1 Hard Limit Protection
For the machine tools mounted with limit switches, the system can detect the switches. When the
slide carriage of the machine tool moves and presses down a limit switch, the system will stop feeding
without turning off the other auxiliary functions, and then the program execution is stopped, with the hard
limit alarm being displayed on the screen.
After the stroke limit alarm is issued, the user can select MANUAL operation mode and then press
the axis move key that moves the carriage in the reverse direction to exit the stroke limit, then the alarm
displayed on the screen will disappear.
【Explanation】
15
1) The positive stroke limit detection of X, Y and Z axes shares the same pin +TL, and the negative
limit detection shares the same pin –TL; If a positive hard limit alarm occurs, all the axes cannot
be moved in positive direction other than in negative direction; and vice versa.
2) When the limit switch hits the limit stopper, the limit signal is generated; The length of the
effective part of the hardware stopper signal should be greater than 300 mm, to prevent the
signal effective area being exceeded.
3) If the “limit emergency stop” mode is set by bit parameter P402_d7=1, there may be a large
Ⅰ
error between the coordinates displayed on the system and the actual ones after the limit
OPERATION
stopper is hit. In such a case, the machine coordinates must be readjusted.
【Related parameters】
Bit parameter: P402_d7, P404_d6, P404_d1.
Therein: Bit parameter P402_d7 sets the modes of the hard limit alarm;
Bit parameter P404_d6 sets whether the hard limit alarm is detected;
Bit parameter P404_d1 sets the level of the hard limit alarm for each axis.
When bit parameter P404_d1=1, the alarm is set to high level. The positive limit switch +X, +Y or +Z
of each axis should be a normal closed contact, and connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface +LT
in series (an alarm occurs if open ); the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis should also be a
normal closed contact, and connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface -LT in series; it is
recommended that the user select a normal closed contact for the hard limit of each axis. The
connection is shown as the figure below:
When bit parameter P404_d1=0, the alarm is set to low level. The positive limit switch +X, +Y or +Z
of each axis should be a normal open contact, and connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface +LT in
parallel (an alarm occurs if closed ); the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis should also be a
normal open contact, and connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface -LT in parallel; The
connection is shown as the figure below:
4.1.4.2 Soft Limit Protection
1） Mechanical soft limit protection
16
Mechanical soft limit protection is used to limit the movement range of the machine coordinates, in
order to prevent the slide carriage from moving beyond the range. If the machine position (machine
coordinates) exceeds the range, the mechanical soft limit alarm is issued.
Method of releasing the overtravel alarm: In MANUAL operation mode, move the carriage in the
opposite direction (e.g. if the positive overtravel occurs, move the carriage in the negative direction; and
vice versa).
Ⅰ
2） Tool nose soft limit protection
Tool nose software limit protection is used to limit the movement range of the tool nose coordinates,
OPERATION
to prevent the range from being exceeded by the tool nose. If the tool nose position (tool nose
coordinates) exceeds the range, the tool nose soft limit alarm is issued.
Method of releasing the overtravel alarm: In MANUAL operation mode, move the carriage in the
opposite direction (e.g. if the positive overtravel occurs, move the carriage in the negative direction; and
vice versa).
【Explanation】
During the movement, if the coordinates exceed the software limit range, the axes will decelerate to
stop.
【Relative parameters】
P009, P010: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of Z axis;
P011, P012: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of X axis;
P013, P014: The max. stroke of tool nose software limit in the positive/negative direction of Y axis;
P015, P016: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of Z axis;
P017, P018: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of X axis;
P019, P020: The max. stroke of mechanical software limit in the positive/negative direction of Y axis;
Bit parameter P404_d4 and P404_d3 respectively set whether the mechanical and tool nose software
limit alarms are valid.
4.1.4.3 Emergency Stop Alarm (Stopping System Emergently)
There is an external emergency stop input terminal ESP among the system interfaces. The user
should connect the normal closed contact of the red mushroom emergency button on the panel to the
terminal. In case of emergency, press the Emergency Stop button to cause the system to enter
emergency stop state, then the system will stop all the feed and turn off the spindle and cooling, issuing
the alarm “Emergency Stop” (If there are other popups displaying on the screen, the emergency stop
function is executed firstly, then the alarm “Emergency Stop” is displayed later).
After the cause of emergency stop is removed, press the Emergency Stop button in the direction of
arrow, then the button will lift automatically, cancelling the emergency stop signal.
When the system is in the emergency stop state, if the external emergency stop signal has been
cancelled, press RESET key to exit the state and return to the operation mode before emergency stop.
When the system is in the emergency stop state, if the external emergency stop signal is not
cancelled, it is forbidden to operate the system in Manual, Auto and Diagnosis operations; but the user
17
can press RESET key to remove the alarm window, and switch the control to Edit, Parameter or Tool
Offset operation mode; if the emergency signal is not cancelled in Edit, Parameter or Tool Offset
operation, press RESET key to remove the alarm window, then it is available to operate system.
If Emergency Stop occurs during movement, there may be a large error between the system
displayed coordinates and the actual ones. Thus the user must readjust the machine coordinates. When
the Emergency Stop button is pressed, the system will execute a series of emergency treatment, which
is shown as follows:
Ⅰ
1) During emergency stop, the system stops all the feed; program execution stops; the spindle
OPERATION
stops and the cooling and lubricating are turned off.

2) During emergency stop, the system automatically sets the states of chuck and tailstock saved in
the memory to M11 and M79 respectively. After the emergency stop is released, the states of
the system chuck and tailstock are M10 and M78 respectively when their foot switches are
pedaled for the first time.
3) During emergency stop, if the system is executing commands such as tool change, chuck,
tailstock or gear shift, the execution will be stopped immediately (tool post positive/negative
rotation signal is cancelled, and whether chuck and tailstock are cancelled depends on the
parameter setting); here, the system assumes that the tool post, chuck, tailstock and gear are in
uncertain positions, and issues red flashing. Only after the emergency stop alarm is released,
can the system recover to the normal state by re-performing the operation successfully, or by
turning off the system and then on.
4) During emergency stop, the interface output signal of MDLY keeps unchanged. How to process
the interface control signals other than those of MDLY, spindle, coolant and lubricant is
determined by parameters. If P403_d3 is set to 0, only the output signals of the spindle, coolant
and lubricant are turned off; if P403_d3 is set to 1, all the interface control signals including the
chuck and tailstock are turned off.
5) After the emergency stop alarm is released, if the system is in the Dry Run state in Auto
operation mode, it will exit the Dry Run state; if the system is in Rapid Traverse state in
MANUAL operation mode, it will automatically enter Feed state; the set F value keeps
unchanged; and the spindle analog voltage keeps unchanged; the states of other functions
except the above are in program initial states.
6) After the emergency stop alarm is released, the time counting of low-pressure detection function
and automatic lubricating control function will be restarted.
【Special attentions】
1） The standard Emergency Stop function executed by the system is the function of turning on or
turning off the system output signals uniformly. The user can set it as follows: In Manual/Auto
operation mode, after Emergency Stop button is pressed, and the system executes the standard
Emergency Stop function, the system executes an additional M74 custom command once (only
when in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode and when there is a solidified M74 command in
the system, the execution is available). This function is applicable to some special machine
components and is used only when some of the output signals are required to turn off and some
18
maintained. If there is an alarm occurs during the execution of the M74 custom command, the
execution is stopped. After the emergency stop button is pressed, if the solidified M74 custom
command is being executed, the system will automatically terminate the command when it
proceeds to an axis move command or tool change command,
2） In Manual/Auto operation mode, when the M74 custom command can be executed in Emergency
Stop state by setting a parameter (P412_d1=1), there is a prompt “+M74” ( indicating the M74 is
Ⅰ
being executed) added on the emergency stop window (if there is a solidified M74 custom
command in the system).
OPERATION
3） For the programming, debugging and solidification of M74 custom command, please see Chapter
Eight “Custom Command Programming” in this manual.
4） Be careful to use M74 function during Emergency Stop. The function is only applicable to some
special machine tools.
When bit parameter P404_d7 is set to 0, the external emergency stop signal is valid; when it is set
to 1, the signal is invalid.
When bit parameter P403_d3=0: If the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system only turns off the
output signals of the spindle, cooling and lubricating.
When bit parameter P403_d3=1: If the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system turns off the
output signals of all auxiliary functions.
Parameter P404_d7 is set for the convenience of system debugging. In the on-line state, it must be
set to the valid state. Otherwise, it cannot provide protection.
Parameter P412_d1 sets whether M74 custom command is executed in the emergency stop state.
4.1.4.4 Drive Unit Alarm
When the CNC system is connected to the alarm output signal of a drive unit, and the drive unit
alarm is issued, the system will automatically stop all the feed, and prompt Z/X axis drive unit alarm on
the screen. All the axes, as well as the program execution, are stopped immediately. Here, check the
drive unit and relative components to remove the fault and then power on the system after power-off.
If the alarm occurs during movement, there may be a large error between the system displayed
coordinates and the actual ones. Therefore, the user must readjust the machine coordinates.
In MANUL operation mode, if the alarm occurs, all the axes movement is stopped.
In AUTO operation mode, if the alarm occurs, it is forbidden to execute the program.
When bit parameter P404_d5 is set to 0, the drive unit alarm is detected.
Bit parameter P405_d4, P405_d3 and P405_d2 set the alarm level of the drive unit respectively for
Z, X and Y axes.
4.1.4.5 Other Alarms
When other alarms are issued in the system, they are displayed on the screen. Here, the user can
handle them according to prompts and the countermeasures described in Chapter Six Alarm Message.
19
4.1.4.6 Power Off
In case of emergency during machine running, the user can turn off the machine power immediately,
so as to prevent accidents.
However, if the power is turned off during coordinate axes movement, please note that there may be
a large error between the system-displayed coordinates and the actual ones after power-on. The user
Ⅰ
must readjust the coordinate coordinates by performing machine zero point return or other means, in
order to make the system displayed coordinates coincide with the actual ones.
OPERATION
4.1.4.7 Reset Operation
When abnormal system output or coordinate axis move occurs, press RESET key to cause the
system to enter Reset state as follows:
1) All axes decelerate to stop.
2) Bit parameter P403_d2 sets whether M function (spindle, coolant) output is valid.
3) Automatic operation ends, and modal functions and states are kept.
4) The system is in G00, G97, G98 state; F value, as well as the spindle analog voltage output,
keeps unchanged.
5) The system terminates the operation in progress, and returns to the initial interface of the current
operation mode.
【Special attentions】
1) The standard Reset function executed by the system is the function of turning on or turning off the
system output signals uniformly. The following function can be set: In Manual/Auto operation,
after Reset button is pressed, and the system executes the standard Reset function, the system
executes an additional M73 custom command (only when in Manual/Auto operation mode and
when there is a solidified M73 command in the system, the execution is available). This
function is applicable to some special machine components and is used when only some of the
output signals are required to turn off and some maintained. If there is an alarm occurs during the
execution of the M73 custom command, the execution is stopped.
2) In Manual/Auto operation mode, when the M73 custom command can be executed in Emergency
Stop state by setting a parameter (P412_d2=1), there is a prompt “+M73” ( indicating the M73 is
being executed) added on the reset window (if there is a solidified M73 custom command in the
system).
3) For the programming, debugging and fixing of M73 custom command, please see Chapter Eight
“Custom Command Programming” in this manual.
4) Be careful to use M73 custom function during Reset. The function is only applicable to some
special machine tools.
20
Chapter Four System Operation – Edit
When bit parameter P403_d2=0: After pressing Reset key, the system will turn off the output
signals of the spindle and cooling.
When bit parameter P403_d2=1: After pressing Reset key, the system will keep the output states
of the spindle and cooling before Reset.
Parameter P412_d2 sets whether M73 custom command is executed during Reset.
4.2 Operation Mode Selection for CNC System
Ⅰ
OPERATION
The operation modes are directly selected by the operation mode keys in this system. It is available
to switch different modes directly, thus realizing simple, convenient and visible operation.
The screen shown in Fig. 4-1 is displayed after system power-on. If no key is pressed, the screen
keeps unchanged. When a key on the panel is pressed, the system enters Edit operation mode.
4.3 Edit Operation Mode
Edit operation mode is to operate the workpiece programs by using the system operation
panel. For each step, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. Also, the user
can press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system to view the list of the system operation
keys in Edit operation mode.
The explanations for the input format and examples about related setting and operation in the
manual are as follows: The meanings and use of the function keys to be pressed are described at the
beginning of the manual; the letter keys, numeric keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the
prompt messages of the system are indicated by a rectangle.
When setting or inputting an item, or during the man-machine dialogue, if ESC key is pressed
before confirmation, the current operation is quit.
◆ The major functions of the Edit operation mode are：

☆ To select, add, rename, copy and delete the workpiece programs;
☆ To input, insert, modify and delete the contents of the workpiece programs selected;
☆ To transfer workpiece programs between U disk and system through the USB interface.
☆ To transfer workpiece programs between external computer and system through the RS232
communication interface;
☆ To transfer workpiece programs between two CNC systems through the RS232 communication
interface;
☆ To compile and save programs
☆ To input variables and macro character strings
Press the operation mode select key to enter EDIT operation mode. The EDIT operation
mode consists of two main pages, which are the program directory search page and program editing
page. The program directory search page is shown as Fig. 4-2.
21
[EDIT] DDIRECTORY Curre Prog No.020 Pro.Size 1KB Top
Name Size Remark Latest Name Size Remark Latest

Upper middle
% 000 1KB G00 X0 Z0
% 001 1KB G0 X115 Z155
% 002 1KB [Key prompt] Popup window

G50 X150 Z25
Middle [U] Enter USB communication
% 020 1KB G00 X300 Z10
[R] Enter RS232 communication
% 032 1KB G50 X250 Z35
Ⅰ
Lower Program count 5 Free memory 394KB

OPERATION
middle Bottom
EDIT JOG AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
Fig. 4-2 Program directory search
◆ Explanations for the contents displaying on each area of the page

Top: Current program number and occupied storage capacity (program size), prompt key hp2 for
system function operation method;
Upper middle: The system arranges the programs in terms of the name, size, remark or latest.
Middle: Displaying the program names, sizes and remarks saved in the system
Lower middle: Operation prompt messages
Bottom: Displaying the number of programs stored in the system (up to 255) and the remaining
storage capacity for programs.
Popup window: Displaying the operation prompt messages.
【Note】
When pressing hp2 key, the system prompts “Program directory interface message prompt”, which
introduces the functions of the keys to be used.
4.3.1 Part Program Directory Search
The part program directory search page displays the number of programs stored in the system. All
the programs can be arranged in the following four orders:
1) Sort by name: Sorting by the program numbers from the top to bottom, and from the left to right;
2) Sort by size: Sorting by the size of the programs, from top to bottom, and from left to right;
3) Sort by remarks: Sorting by the size of the first 12 strings in the first line of the programs, from
top to bottom, and from left to right;
4) Sort by latest: Sorting by the time that the programs are input, from top to bottom, and from left to
right.
The user can retrieve all the programs by pressing and cursor keys and
and page keys. 12 programs can be displayed on one screen; pressing key turns the
22
screen to the previous page, and pressing turns the screen to the next page; Pressing
or key sorts the programs by name, size, remark or latest.
4.3.2 Selecting, Creating, Deleting, Renaming and Copying a Part Program
Ⅰ
It means the operation of selecting, creating, deleting, renaming or copying a part program.
【Note】
OPERATION
1. Up to 255 programs can be operated, from number %000～%254. When operating a program
number bigger than 254, the system prompts “E160 Input program number error”.
2. If there are no part programs in the system, or it is the first time that the system is used, the
system automatically creates and selects No. %000 program as the current program. If there are
part programs in the system, the system arranges the programs which existed before last
power-off according to their numbers.
3. The system supports multiple inputs, with the leading zero omissible. E.g. inputs the program
with name %003. Press INPUT key, and then input 0 0 3; or 0 3; or 3 .
4.3.2.1 Selecting and Creating a Part Program
The steps of selecting a part program or creating a new part program are as follows:
① Press INPUT key in EDIT operation mode;
② Input the program number to be selected using the keyboard, or input a program number not
included in the program directory as a new program number;
③ Press ENTER key;
④ Then the part program selection or creation is completed. The screen displays the contents of
the program, and the system enters the program edit page.
【Note】
1) After selecting a program, the user can change the desired program only through the above
steps; once a program is selected, it keeps unchanged even if the power is turned off.
2) If the input part program does not exist in the program directory, a new program with the input
program number is created and taken as the current program.
【Example】
Example 1: The procedures of creating a part program with number %20 when it is not included in
the program directory:
Press keys: INPUT 2 0 ENTER. The new program with name %020 is created,
and the system enters program edit page.
Example 2: Procedures of selecting the part program with number %001 when it is included in the
program directory:
Press keys: INPUT 1 ENTER. The program with number %001 is selected, and the
system enters program edit page.
23
4.3.2.2 Deleting a Part Program
The procedures of deleting a part program are as follows:

① Press INPUT key in Edit operation mode;
② Input the program name to be deleted using the keyboard;
③ Press DELETE key, then the system prompts: ENTER-Confirm Deletion ESC-Exit Deletion;
④ Press ENTER key to delete the part program whose number is input; or press ESC key to cancel
Ⅰ
the deletion, and returns the control to the Edit operation mode.
OPERATION
【Note】
1) If the program to be deleted does not exist, the system prompts “E100 The program to be
deleted does not exist；
2) If the program to be deleted already exists: when it is not the current program, it is deleted from
the program list; when it is the current program, it is deleted from the program list, and the
system takes the program with the smallest number on the list as the current program; when
there are no programs existing after deletion, the system automatically creates an empty
program with name 000 as the current program.
【Example】
Example: The procedures of deleting the program with number %003 are as follows:
Press keys: ENTER 3 DELETE ENTER. The program with number %003 is deleted
from the part program storage area.
4.3.2.3 Deleting All Part Programs
It is the operation of deleting the program area in the program directory search page, i.e. deleting all
the programs once; the procedures are as follows:
① Press INPUT key in the state of part program directory search;
② Input , from the keyboard;

③ Press DELETE key, then the system prompts: ENTER-Confirm to delete all programs
ESC-Escape deletion;
④ Press ENTER key to delete all the programs; press ESC key to cancel the deletion, and return
the control to the Edit operation mode.
【Note】
After all the programs are deleted, the system will create an empty program with a name 0000 as
the current program.
4.3.2.4 Renaming a Part Program
The part program renaming is to replace the name of the current program by a new one. The new
program is taken as the current program. The procedures are as follows:
① Press INPUT key;
24
② Input a program number which does not exist in the program directory, and press ALTER key to
change the current program name to the one input.
【Note】
If the input program number already exists, the system prompts “E166 The program to be
renamed already exists”. Input another name after the prompt disappears.
【Example】
Ⅰ
Example: The procedures of renaming the current program ％000 as ％005 are as follows:
OPERATION
Press keys: INPUT 5 ALTER. Then the renaming is completed.
4.3.2.5 Copying a Part Program
It is to copy the contents of the current program to a new program. The newly created program is
taken as the current program. The procedures are as follows:
① Press Input key;

② Input a nonexistent program name as a new program, then press INPUT key to copy the
contents of the current program to the new program. The new program is taken as the current
program.
【Note】
If the input program name already exists, the system prompts “E161 The program to be copied
already exists”. It is available to input another program name again after the prompt disappears.
【Example】
Example: Procedures of copying the current program ％000 to program ％005 are as follows:
Press keys: INPUT 5 INPUT. Then the copy is completed.
4.3.3 Part Program Communication
The communication of part programs consists of part program sending and part program
receiving. The part programs can be sent from system to computer (CNC→PC), from system to U disc
(CNC→USB), or between two CNC systems (CNC→CNC); in addition, the system can receive the part
programs from a computer (PC→CNC), from another system(CNC→CNC), or from a U disc
(USB→CNC).
When pressing hp6 key on the program directory search page, the system prompts the part
program communication interface.
4.3.3.1 Sending Part Program (CNC→PC, CNC→USB, CNC→CNC)
Mode 1: RS232 serial communication

1) Before transferring the files, set the communication baudrates of parameter P414_d7 and
P414_d6. The communication baudrate is decided by the setting of the sender. Setting range:
25
9600, 19200, 38400（unit：bps）. Factory standard setting: 9600 bps. For how to set the baudrate,
see Section 4.6 “Parameter Operation Mode” in PartⅠ Programming.
2) Output the part programs stored in the system to an external computer or CNC system:
① Connect the communication cable with the system power OFF, then turn on the system.
② On program directory search page, press keys: hp6 → R → hp2 in order;
③ Select the programs to be sent according to the help information of hp2.
Ⅰ
④ Press ENTER key to send the programs;

OPERATION
⑤ Enable the external computer or CNC system to remain in receiving state; (For details, see
Chapter Five “RS232 and USB System Communication”)
⑥ The system sends the selected programs, and displays the progress bar at the same time till
the sending is completed; if multiple programs are selected, the system sends the programs
one by one in the ascending order according to their program numbers.
⑦ It is possible to interrupt the sending by pressing ESC key.
Mode 2: USB communication;

1） After entering USB communication mode, the system first checks whether a U disc has been
inserted. If no U disc is inserted, the system displays a prompt message box, prompting No USB
device inserted . If a USB disc containing a folder named “C001PRO” has been inserted, and
there are CNCxxx.TXT files in the folder, the files will be listed on the USB file directory box. If
there are no CNCxxx.TXT files in the C001PRO folder, the system prompts: USB device
specified directory: C001 PRO has no programs. If the folder named“C001PRO”does not exist in
the U disc, the system prompts: No specified directory in USB device: C001 PRO.
2） Output the part programs stored in the system to the U disc:
① Insert an UBS disc into the USB interface of the system;
② The system automatically opens the file directory of the U disc (when the U disc contains a
folder “C001PRO”, and the folder contains files “CNCxxx.TXT”). If the folder named
“C001PRO” does not exist in the USB root directory, the system will create one.
③ On program directory search page, press keys: hp6 → U → EDIT in order;
④ Select the programs to be sent according to the help information of hp2;
⑤ Press ENTER key to send the programs, and select the send mode according to the system
prompts.
⑥ The system sends the programs according to the selected mode, and displays the progress
bar till the sending is completed;
⑦ Press ESC key to exit the U disc.
4.3.3.2 Receiving Part Programs (PC→CNC, USB→CNC, CNC→CNC)
Mode 1: RS232 serial communication;

1) Set the baudrate and communication port of the communication software; (for details, see
Chapter Five “RS232 and USB System Communication” in PartⅠ Programming)
26
2) Input the part programs stored in the external computer to the system; or transfer programs
between CNC systems; the procedures are as follows:
① Connect the communication cable with the system power OFF, then turn on the system;
② On the program directory search page, press keys: hp6 → R → EDIT in order;
③ Select the receive mode according to the system prompts;
④ After confirming the system is in receive state, input the programs stored in the external
Ⅰ
computer or CNC system to the CNC system.
⑤ The system inputs the programs according to the selected receive mode, and displays the
OPERATION
progress bar until the receiving is completed;
⑥ It is possible to stop receiving programs pressing ESC key in the progress of receiving.
Mode 2: USB communication;

1） After entering USB communication mode, the system first checks the U disc, and then opens the
folder “C001PRO” to list the “CNCxxx.TXT” files in the folder.
2） Output the part programs stored in the U disc to the CNC system:
① Insert the U disc into the USB interface of the system;
② On the program directory search page, press keys: hp6 → U in order;
③ The system automatically opens the file directory of the U disc;
④ Select the programs to be received according the help information of hp2;
⑤ Press ENTER key to receive programs, and select the send mode according to the system
prompts;
⑥ The system receives part programs according to the selected receive mode, and displays the
progress bar until the receiving is completed;
⑦ Press ESC key to exit the U disc.
【Note】
If the name of a program to be sent to the system already exists in the system, the system prompts
whether to replace the original one. Once replaced, the original program will be replaced by the
sent program.
4.3.3.3 Standard Format of TXT Part Program on PC
On a personal computer, the part program can be edited using TXT or LST text. However, the file
name and its contents must be edited in the standard format required in the system, so that the program
can be correctly sent to the system. The specifications are as follows:
1) On a personal computer, the user should name the part program file with suffix TXT or LST, e.g.
“CNC008.TXT”; It is recommended that the user use suffix TXT for the convenience of the part
program operation on the PC.
2) The first line of the TXT file must indicate the program number, in the format of “ % XXX ”, i.e. an
one-digit, two-digit or three digit number behind the percent, within a range of 0~254. No other
contents can be contained in the first line. The range of the program number must be within
0~254. Otherwise, the system fails to receive the programs and prompts corresponding error
27
messages. The program numbers are determined by the following two modes (USB and RS232)
after the CNC receives the programs:
◆ In system RS232 communication, the program name to be stored is subject to the
program number of the first line; i.e. the Arabic numerals XXX of the string “%XXX” in
the first line of the program sent by the PC.
◆ The number of the program transferred by the USB is the Arabic numerals xxx of
CNCxxx.TXT in the folder “C001PRO” in the U disc root directory.
Ⅰ
Note: In system USB communication, The Arabic numerals XXX in string “%XXX” of the first line in
OPERATION
the program should be the same as the Arabic numerals XXX in CNCxxx.TXT in the folder
“C001PRO” of the U disc root directory.
3) The second line and the following are blocks. The format of a block must accord with the
requirement, and each block, ended with ENTER key, cannot contain more than 250 characters.
Otherwise, the system reports an error message “Block overlong in received program”
4） The comment area of the block can contain comments in Chinese.
5) The size of the TXT file cannot exceed the limit of the program storage capacity of the system.
Standard format of part program communication on PC:

TXT file format Explanation
%099 1. When the system is receiving a program,
N0000 G50 X100 Z100 ； Setting coordinate the program name %099 cannot be
system omitted; the first line must be a
N0010 G00 X20 Z90 ； Rapid positioning three-digit number between 0~254.
G01 X10 Z80 ； Linear cutting 2. N**** is the line number of a block.
…… Blocks without N**** have no line
numbers.
/N0250 G02 X30 Z20 R5 ； Circular cutting
3. The beginning of each line is a space.
N0260 ；T22 ； Tool change 4. For the block with a line number, there
N0262 M05 is a space between the line number and
N0270 G04 D8 the command.
…… 5. / indicates the block is skipped;
M20 6. ; The contents behind it are comments.
4.3.4 Inputting and Editing the Contents of Part Program
The input part program consists of a number of blocks, and each block includes a block number,
commands, data, etc. The format of the program should be consistent with the general programming
rules described in Part Ⅱ Programming, and no alarm should occur during program compiling. For the
alarm prompts, see Chapter Six Alarm Message in Part Ⅱ Programming. Only after the correct program
contents are input according to order of the technological requirements, can the machine tool produce
qualified parts.
The system employs the full-screen edit mode, and the program edit page is shown in Fig. 4-3:
28
【EDIT】 %001 Column 8 Line 3 Lines 11 Size 1KB hp2 Top
N0000 G0 X100
N0010 X0
N0020 X100
N0030 X0
N0040 G1 X100 F80
Currrent editting program Popup
Middle N0050 X0
compiling succeeds window
N0060 X100
Ⅰ
N0070 X0
N0080 X100
N0090 X0
OPERATION
N0100 G1 Z100
N0120 M20
Fig. 4-3 Program editing
◆ Explanations for each area of the interface
Top: Program number and program size of the current program, number of lines, line and column at
which the edit cursor (prompt symbol of editable character on current position ) is located,
prompt key hp2 for system function operation;
Middle: Program edit window;
Popup window: Displaying prompt information for operation.
【Note】
1. After pressing hp2 key, the system prompts “Program editing Help message prompts”,
introducing the functions of the help keys to be used.
2. When bit parameter P416_d0 is set to 1, it is forbidden to edit or alter a program, and the
system displays alarm message E174 Part programs are locked, and forbidden to
modify; when it is required to edit and alter a program, set the bit parameter P416_d0 to
0.
Meanings and use of edit keys on program edit page
1) , cursor up and down keys

By pressing a cursor key once, the cursor moves up (or down) vertically till it reaches the
uppermost (or lowest) line, taking the current cursor column value as the reference movement
value. By holding the cursor key, the cursor moves up (or down) continuously till the first (or last)
block is reached, or till the key is released. When using the string search function (hp5), the two
keys are used for retrieving the desired string up and down.
2) , Cursor left and right move keys
By pressing a cursor key once, the cursor moves one character towards left (or right). By
holding the cursor key, the cursor continuously moves to the left (or right) till the first (or last)
character of the block is reached, or till the key is released.
29
3） Line Home key: The cursor rapidly moves to the beginning of a line or the beginning of
the first word of the line. When repeating pressing the Line Home key, the cursor
location is switched between the beginning of a line and the first word of the line. By
pressing the Line Home key and Delete key together, the current line is deleted.
Ⅰ
Line End key: The cursor rapidly moves to the end of a line.
OPERATION
4） Insert/Alter key:
Changing the edit input mode: By pressing the ALTER key once, the input mode
toggles between Insert and Alter, with the cursor displaying in different shapes. In
Insert mode, the cursor is a flicking underscore, while in Alter mode, the cursor
becomes a flicking and highlighted block cursor.
5） Input key: It switches the program edit state to the program directory search state,
displaying Please input program number;.
6） Page up and Page down keys

They are used for turning pages to display programs. When used in the function of
hp5 key, they move the cursor to Home/End page; when used in the function of hp3
key, they are used for other purposes.
7） Enter key:
It inserts a new line when the cursor is located at the beginning or the end of a line,
with the cursor moving to the new line; when the cursor is located in other position, it
moves to the beginning of the next block by pressing Enter key.
8） Delete key: It is for deleting a whole program or the characters in a block.
9） hp2 key: Help information for program editing.
hp3 key: Current program compiling.
30
10 ） hp4 key: On program edit page, the user can control the movement of the cursor using
a MPG, browsing the programs rapidly.
Ⅰ
hp5 key: Help for system commands, part program string search, etc. If the program
OPERATION
number of the current program is 253 or 254, the operation of the program with
number 253 or 254 is added.
hp6 key: It prompts to display macro string list.
Rules for multi-function definition key

1) If the first letter in a line is a capital, the first key has the priority; if the first letter is lowercase
letter, the third or second key has the priority.
2) If a letter or string is input behind a number (0~9), a space between them will be created
automatically.
3) After a string is input, the cursor stays in the position that is the most convenient for inputting.
Table of values for multi-function definition keys

First key Second Third key First key Second Third key
Panel display Panel display
value key value value value key value value
G r F N ()
( )
M H = I P
X J > K Space
>
Z Q < D V and
< and
S if R Y or
or
T L then *
. *
then
U E else - +
else
W / ；
/ ;
4.3.4.1 Inputting Program Contents
Note: Set the value of parameter P333 to 10 (program number automatic creation, similarly
hereinafter)
31
On program edit page, input the contents of a part program by the following steps:
① Create a new program by means of creating a new part program;
② After the block number N0000 is displayed, input a line of program contents from the keyboard;
③ After the input, press ENTER key to end the input of this line;
④ The system automatically creates the number of the next block for user to continue inputting;
⑤ After the last line of the program is input, press ESC key to end the input of the program.
Ⅰ
【Note】
1） The first column of each line must be the space;
OPERATION
2） Up to 60 characters can be displayed for one block. If there are more than 60 characters, the
remaining ones are not displayable. If the cursor is at the end of a line, the cursor moves a
character towards left by pressing key.

3） The first column of each line is a space, which is created automatically by the system; the
number of the first column is 1, and that of the last column is 252; Only the cursor rather than the
character can be displayed at the first and last column; up to 250 characters can be edited in one
block.
4.3.4.2 Inserting a Block
Insert a block or multiple blocks between two blocks; or insert a block or multiple blocks before the
current block. The procedures are as follows:
① For two adjacent blocks, move the cursor to the end of the first block or to the beginning of the
second block;
② By pressing Enter key, the system automatically creates a new block number between the
current block and the next block (the increment of the sequence number is the integer which is
1/4 of the value set in parameter P333. If the numbers are not enough, modify the number of the
next block.) and leaves one blank line.
③ Input the desired contents to the block;
④ After the input, if it is necessary to insert multiple blocks, press ENTER key; if only one block is
required to insert, this operation is unnecessary.
【Example】
Example: The operation procedures of inserting a new block M3 between block N0020 and block
N0030 are as follows:
Move the cursor to the end of block N0020 or to the beginning of block N0030; Press Enter
key, then input M3 for the new block.
4.3.4.3 Deleting a Block
The procedures of deleting all contents (including the block name) in one line are as follows:
① Move the cursor to the beginning of the block to be deleted;
② Press DELETE key;
③ Delete all the contents of the selected block.
32
4.3.4.4 Inserting a Character in a Block
The procedures of inserting a character in a block are as follows:

① Pressing ALTER key to switch the input mode to Insert mode, i.e. the cursor is displayed as an
underscore;
② Move the cursor to the character behind the position where the contents are to be inserted;
Ⅰ
③ Input the desired contents
OPERATION
④ Insert the desired contents before the character where the cursor is located.
【Note】
According to the requirement of the system, a space must be left between two words (a word means
a letter followed by digits) to separate them. The space can be created automatically during program
editing. However, it may not be created during insertion operation. In this case, the operator is required
to input the space, in order to keep the program complete.
【Example】
Example: The procedures of inserting 1 between X and 0 in the block N0020 G0
X0.0 Z0.0 are as follows:
Move the cursor to the bottom of 0 behind X , then input 1 . Then the screen
displays N0020 G0 X10.0 Z0.0
4.3.4.5 Deleting a Character in a Block
The procedures of deleting characters in a block are as follows:

① Move the cursor to the character to be deleted;
② Press DELETE key to delete the character where the cursor is located.
4.3.4.6 Altering Contents of a Block
Change the contents of a block. There are two methods depending on the input mode (Insert/Alter)
In Insert mode: Procedures of altering a block using the combination of insertion and deletion:
① Move the cursor to the character to be altered;
② Input the new contents;
③ Press DELETE key to delete the unnecessary contents;
In Alter mode: Procedures of directly altering the contents where the cursor is located:
① Press ALTER key to switch the cursor to Alter mode (the character where the cursor is located is
highlighted by a rectangle);
② Move the cursor to the character to be altered;
③ Input the new contents, then the cursor moves to the next character.
【Example】
33
Example: The procedures to alter X in block N0020 G0 X0.0 Z0.0 to U are as follows:
Switch the input mode to ALTER mode, move the cursor to the bottom of X , and then input U.
After alteration, the block becomes N0020 G0 U 0.0 Z0.0.
4.3.4.7 Inserting a Macro String
On program edit page, the procedures of inserting a macro string are as follows:
① Press hp6 key to display on the screen the macro string list;
Ⅰ
② Select the contents to be input by pressing keys according to prompts.

OPERATION
【Example】
Example: Press hp6 key, then G key, and then input program contents: r = r * r / r. Here, the cursor
stays behind r.
【Note】
For details about the variables and statement programming, please see Chapter Seven Statement
Programming in Part Ⅱ Programming.
4.3.4.8 Storage Capacity for Programs
The system provides 400k storage capacity for storing programs from No.0~ No.252, and No.254.
Therefore, the size of a single program can reach 400K theoretically. For No.253, the system provides
another 4 M storage space.
【Explanation】
1) The screen displays the remaining program storage capacity, as well as the remaining storage
size of the system program area.
2) If the size of the program (No. 0～252, 254) being edited currently is greater than the max.
storage capacity (400k), the program cannot be saved. and the system prompts that the program
storage space is full: Edit area overflow. If the remaining storage space is insufficient, delete
some old programs.
3) The edit storage space for No. 253 program is 4 M, but the program cannot be saved.
4) If the size of a program is large, it takes longer time to save the program.
4.3.4.9 Operating No. 253 Program
As the size of No. 253 program can be up to 4M, the operation of this program is special. The
procedures are as follows:
1） The No. 253 program cannot be saved into the system. It is lost after power-off.
2） When No. 253 program is changed to other programs, the No. 253 program cannot be saved
neither, i.e. it will be lost;
3） The communication of No. 253 program is unavailable by using USB or RS232 mode.
【Note】
1) No.253 program cannot be saved.
34
2) No.253 program cannot by copied or renamed.
4.3.4.10 Operating No. 254 Program
After selecting No. 254 program on program edit page, press hp5 key, then the help information
about how to edit, solidify and read No. 254 program appears. The operation procedures are as follows:
1) Key 5, for editing and solidifying No. 254 program:
Ⅰ
When compiling No. 254 program, if the compiling fails, the system issues an alarm; if the
compiling succeeds, the program is saved to the solidification area (FLASH)
OPERATION
2) Key 4, for extracting No. 254 program:
It reads No. 254 program saved in the solidification area (FLASH) to the edit buffer area, to
update the program.
3) Key 6, for deleting the custom command of No. 254 program
If there is a custom command in the solidification area, the command will be displayed on the
screen. After the custom command in No. 254 program is deleted, there is no custom command
in the system solidification area; the help information dialog box for No. 254 program prompts
“No custom command in solidification area”
4) Press ESC key to exit the current state.
4.3.5 Function of hp5 Key
hp5 help key includes help for system commands, help for obtaining relative parameters of an arc,
rearrangement of line numbers, replacement of strings, cursor location, MPG cursor movement, etc.
If the program number of the current program is 253 or 254, hp5 help key adds the prompts for the
operation of No. 253 program or No. 254 program.
4.3.5.1 Help for Part Program Command
When hp5 1 are input on program edit page, the system prompts “Command help introduction”
interface; this function is capable of retrieving all the commands of the system, including G, M, S, T, F
commands. The operation procedures are as follows:
1) Press G, M, S, T, or F key to respectively view the corresponding explanation for the G, M, S, T or
F command.
2) Press INPUT key, then input the command number to be searched; the system displays the
meaning, function, format as well as explanation for the command number.
【Example】
Example: Searching the command help for G05

Press keys: hp5 1 INPUT G 05 ENTER, then the system prompts the meaning, function,
format and explanation for G05.
35
4.3.5.2 Help for Obtaining Relative Parameters of Arc
Input hp5 2 on program edit page, then the system prompts “Please input relative arc parameters”
interface; this function is for obtaining the parameters of an arc.
Input [start point coordinates] , [end point coordinates] , [circle radius ], then the system will
automatically calculate the relative parameters of the arc.
【Example】
Ⅰ
OPERATION
As shown in the figure below: Coordinates of start point A (Z60，X10), coordinates of start pinot B
(Z40，X30).
[Please input relative arc parameters] (Explanation: X direction is the radial programming,
P413_d6=1 )
[Start point coordinates] Z： 60 X： 10
[End point coordinates] Z： 40 X： 30
[Circle radius] R： 20
After inputting the data above, the system will automatically calculate the following data:
CW circle center 1: Z： 40 X： 10 (The values of Z and X are：the coordinate values
of CW circle center 1.)
CCW circle center 2: Z： 60 X： 30 (The values of Z and X are：the coordinate values
of CW circle center 2.)
Start point -> Circle center 1: Z： -20 X： 0 (The values of Z and X are：the Z and X vectors
of start point A pointing to circle center 1.)
End point -> Circle center 1: Z： 0 X： -20 (The values of Z and X are：the Z and X vectors
of end point B pointing to circle center 1.)
Start point -> Circle center 2： Z： 0 X： 20 (The values of Z and X are：the Z and X vectors
of start point A pointing to circle center 2)
End point-> Circle center 2: Z： 20 X： 0 (The values of Z and X are：the Z and X vectors
of end point B pointing to circle center 2)
36
4.3.5.3 Rearrangement of Program Line Numbers
Input hp5 3 on program edit page, then the system rearranges the programs, with the rearranged
program numbers increased based on the multiple of 10. (Parameter P333 is set to 10)
【Note】
1) After the block numbers are rearranged, if the skip command is used in programming, the
Ⅰ
program skip error may occur.
2) When the value of parameter P333 is 0, the program number rearrangement function is invalid.
OPERATION
4.3.5.4 Replacement of Strings
Input hp5 R on program edit page, then the system prompts “String replacement” page; perform
the operation according to the system prompts. After the replacement of the string, all the characters to
be replaced are replaced from the current character where the cursor is located to the last character.
4.3.5.5 Cursor Position
The string search function provided by the system is used for locating the contents to be searched,
which is convenient for the user to search the desired contents. Press hp5 key on program edit page,
then the system prompts the functions of , , , and F key as follows:
1) Press key to move the cursor to the first page of the current program.
2) Press key to move the cursor to the last page of the current program.
3) After pressing F key, input the string to be searched in the current program, then press ENTER
key. After that, the cursor is located at the searched string, highlighted in red. In inputting the
string to be searched, the system automatically records the latest 10 times of string search. If
there is no record, nothing is displayed.
4) According to the system prompts, press or to move the cursor up or down to

search the desired string in the current program. If the desired string does not exist in the current
program, the system prompts: Search completed, string not found
4.3.5.6 Cursor Movement by MPG
After the MPG is connected to the system, press MPG key on the program edit page. You can
quickly browse the programs by rotating the MPG to control the movement of the cursor when the MPG
LED indicator on the operation panel lights up. By pressing MPG key again, the LED indicator goes out.
In this case, it is unavailable to perform MPG operation. For the connection of MPG, see Part Ⅲ
Connection.
37
4.3.6 Compiling a Part Program
The compiling command key hp3 in the system is used for compiling a part program, and checking
the grammar error, logic error, and whether the coordinate data causes overtravel according to the
execution path of the part program, in a bid to reduce the alarm errors when the program is executed in
AUTO operation mode, and improve the safety of executing the part program.
Ⅰ
By pressing the compiling command key, the system checks and compiles the part program from the
first block according to the execution path, and generates an object code which is convenient for
execution. If an error in the program is detected, the system stops the compiling, displaying the word
OPERATION
position and error number in the block where the source program error occurs, and prompting the user to
modify the error.
4.3.6.1 hp3 Compiling Command
On program edit page, press hp3 key, the system compiles the current program line by line. If an
error message is detected, a window『Program Alarm 』pops up. If no error exists in all commands, the
system displays: Current program compiling succeeded
The information of 『Program Alarm』consists of:
Error: indicates error codes (View Chapter Six Alarm Message in PART Ⅱ Programming
according to the codes);
Program: indicates contents in the error block;
Position: indicates error letter or word in the error block.
【Explanation】
1) Only those programs successfully compiled by hp3 can be executed in Auto operation mode.
2) The system automatically completes the compiling when the control is switched from edit
operation mode to other operation modes.
3) After『Program Alarm』appears during the compiling by hp3 key, the cursor automatically moves
to the error block by pressing any key.
4) During the execution of hp3 compiling command, the system starts execution from the first
block of the current program, assuming that the axes of the machine take the position of the
current workpiece coordinates as the start point. Therefore, for some special programs, the
stop position of each axis may affect the compiling; it is suggested that each axis stop in
advance at the machining start point.
4.3.6.2 Result Analysis of Program Compilation
On program edit page, there are two types of alarm due to program compiling error: [Program Alarm]
and [Program Compound Check Alarm]. Only when the above types of alarm are not issued, can the
compiling succeed.
Therein:
38
Program alarm: means the alarms caused by the command error in the programming. The alarm
can be removed by inputting a correct command. It is not closely relative to the parameter setting.
Program compound check alarm: means the alarm which occurs during the program command
check (relevance check according to the setting of auxiliary parameters and interface parameters). It is
required to analyze the program in accordance with the setting of auxiliary parameters and interface
parameters, and then modify the program and parameter setting to remove the alarm.
Ⅰ
【Example】
OPERATION
[Example for program alarm]:
When pressing hp3 key to compile a program, the alarm is displayed as follows:
［Program alarm］
Error E206：Missing message
Program：N0100 G92 Z300 P1
Position： P
[Example for program compound check alarm］

After the current program is compiled successfully by pressing hp3 key, and the control is switched
from the Edit operation mode to the other modes, the alarm is displayed as follows:
［Program comound check alarm］

Error E610： Illegal use of M78
This function is invalid.
4.3.6.3 Prompts of Program Compound Check
After the program is compiled, if no error is detected, in general, the program can be executed in
Auto operation mode. However, under the following conditions, the system displays the prompts of the
program compound check.
1) The range of tool nose soft limit or machine soft limit is exceeded.
During the execution of the program, if the range of tool nose soft limit or machine soft limit is
exceeded, the system displays the program compound check prompts when the control is switched from
EDIT operation mode to AUTO operation mode.
2）Inconsistent with the tool setting record
If tool setting inconsistence occurs during the execution of the program, the system displays the
program compound check prompts when the control is switched from the EDIT operation mode to the
AUTO operation mode.
【Example】
[Example for program compound check alarm]
E.g. When the tool is T0408 during tool setting, and there is T0308 in the program, it is inconsistent
with the tool setting record; When bit parameter P403_d4 is set to 1, an alarm message T0308
inconsistent with tool setting record T0408 pops up when the control is switched from the EDIT operation
mode to the AUTO operation mode.
39
4.4 JOG Operation Mode
In JOG (Manual) operation mode, the user can perform a certain operation pressing function keys
directly, or perform a certain setting or operation pressing letter keys. For each step, the system offers
corresponding intelligent prompt messages.
Descriptions for the relative setting or the input format and examples of relative operation are as
Ⅰ
follows: The function keys required to press are indicated by a sign; the letter keys or numeric keys
are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are indicated by a rectangle.
OPERATION
If incorrect data is input during the input of letters or figures, press key to delete it , and then
input the correct data
When setting or inputting an item, or during the man-machine dialogue, if ESC key is pressed before
confirmation, it means the current operation is quit
In Manual operation mode, key is displayed on the upper right corner of the screen; After
pressing this key, a window pops up, displaying the directory of the operation keys in Manual mode;
by pressing this key again, the window is closed; by pressing other function keys directly, the window
is automatically closed.
Press operation mode select key to enter Manual operation mode.

For the CNC machine tool, a large amount of work, such as the installation and debugging of a variety of
electrical components, debugging of motion performance, establishment of the coordinate system and
tool preparation, is completed in Manual operation mode.
After the Manual page is entered, the system performs necessary analysis and pre-check in accordance
with the user parameter list and tool offset values. If the precheck finds that the Manual operation may
result in serious accidents, the system locks the function of Manual operation, and pops up a window
displaying an alarm message; In this case, the user should modify relative parameters according to the
alarm message, and then perform Manual operation.
This system provides multiple modes for the execution of part programs. Before the execution, the user
can perform necessary setting in Manual operation mode, to ensure the safety during machining.
◆ The main functions of Manual operation mode include:
☆ The axes can be moved in JOG mode, STEP mode or MPG mode.
☆ The axes can be moved by absolute or incremental programming.
☆ Establishment of machine coordinate system, establishment of workpiece coordinate system
☆ Auxiliary functions such as spindle, chuck, cooling, or tool post
☆ Tool setting
☆ Real-time display of the states of the machine tool, real-time alarm displayed in a popup window.
Note: 928TD system has no Y axis function.
40
Chapter Four System Operation - Jog
The Manual page is displayed as fig. 4-4:
[JOG] Top
JOG
Popup X 0289.850ESP Emergency T 01 00

window stop alarm
Z 0104.060
Ⅰ
Upper 100%
left 100%
Middle
OPERATION
S01 S0500 right
G97 S0200 r
Lower left
G98 F30
F 00100
EDIT JOG AUTO PARA OFFS DIAG
Fig. 4-4, Manual operation mode
◆ Explanation for each area of the interface:
Top: Displaying the manual feed operation mode, including JOG, STEP, X/Z MPG; prompt key
for system function operation methods;
Upper left: Displaying tool nose coordinates as well as machine coordinates;
Lower left: MDI input and alarm prompt area;
Middle right: Displaying the current states of the machine, including messages about the spindle,
cooling, lubricating, chuck, tailstock, rotating speed and cutting speed;
Popup window: Displaying the system alarm messages.
◆ Explanations for the display of auxiliary function states:

1) The states of auxiliary functions are indicated by an icon or corresponding instruction code sign;
2) A black sign indicates the current state; e.g. spindle, cooling, etc;
3) A red sign indicates the function is being executed;
4) A blinking red sign indicates that the function was unsuccessfully executed or interrupted (e.g.
reset, emergency stop) last time, and the system assumes that the corresponding function is in
an uncertain state. When the tool or chuck is in an uncertain state, it is unavailable to start the
machining program; Only by performing a successful operation or turning the power OFF then
back ON, can the system recover to the normal state.
5) When there is constant response detection for the chuck/tailstock, the green signal indicates a
normal state, while the yellow sign indicates an abnormal state;
6) The S behind the spindle gear indicates the spindle speed detected in real time;
7) Pressure detection icon △: It is green when it is normal. It becomes half-empty yellow as soon
as the low pressure is detected; when the time that the low pressure lasts exceeds half of the
time set in P332, it turns to entirely-empty yellow;
8) G96/G97 and S indicate whether the mode is the constant surface speed cutting mode; S
indicates the set surface speed or rotating speed, unit: m/minor r/min;
9) G98/G99 indicates whether the mode is feed per rotation or feed per minute; F is the set cutting
speed;
10) F indicates the actual movement speed of the coordinate axis.
41
4.4.1 Coordinate Axis Movement
Before moving the coordinate axis, please determine the movement speed, movement
distance first. In case of emergency, press down the Emergency Stop button immediately.
Ⅰ
4.4.1.1 JOG movement

OPERATION
By pressing key, the control can be switched from STEP or MPG mode to JOG mode.
【JOG movement】means holding a coordinate axis movement key to cause the machine slide
carriage to move continuously; When the key is released, the machine carriage decelerates to stop.
The meanings of axis movement keys are as follows:
X axis – direction movement key; X axis + direction movement key
Z axis/Y axis – direction movement key (That the indicator of key lights up is
for Y axis.)
Z axis/Y axis + direction movement key (That the indicator of key lights up is for
Y axis.)
◆ Switching between Z and Y axes:
By pressing Z/Y axis switch key, the user can switch the operation between Z axis and Y axis; that
the Z/Y axis switch indicator lights up is for Y axis operation. (when bit parameter P405_d1=1, the
machine tool has Y axis, then the switch is valid). Note: 928TD system has no Y axis function.
When the machine tool is switched to Y axis operation, it is also the Y axis that is valid for operations
such as program reference point return and machine zero point return.
【Attention】
1) When the motor is running at a high speed, if the coordinate axis movement key has been
released, the machine carriage keeps moving instead of stopping immediately, because of the
automatic acceleration/deceleration of the system. The movement distance varies with the max.
motor speed, system acceleration/deceleration time and feedrate. The higher the speed is, and
the longer the acceleration/deceleration time is, the longer the distance the slide carriage moves;
and vice versa.
4.4.1.2 Step Movement
By pressing key, the system can be switched from JOG mode or MPG mode to STEP
mode.
【STEP movement】indicates that the slide carriage moves a pre-set step width pressing a
coordinate axis movement key once. The movement speed is executed at the selected rapid traverse
42
rate or feedrate. However, the max. movement speed of Z, X, Y axis is respectively limited by parameter
P100, P101, P102.
By holding the key, the slide carriage feeds continuously by step width. The last step width is moved
when the key is released. The step width of Step movement is displayed in the black background.
The step width of STEP movement is divided into 6 levels: 0.001 0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0 50.0.
Press STEP REGULATION key repeatedly to select a level.
Ⅰ
【Note】
1) The movement can be stopped by pressing CYCLE PAUSE key during movement. After the key is
OPERATION
pressed, the slide carriage decelerates to stop, without retaining the remaining step width.
4.4.1.3 MPG Control Movement
Pressing key, the user can switch the control from JOG or STEP mode to MPG mode.
That the indicator lights up indicates the MPG mode is selected.
【MPG movement】indicates that the system receives the pulse signals generated from the manual
pulse generator (MGP or handwheel) to control the movement of the axis. The user can slightly control
the movement of the coordinate axis by rotating the MPG.
◆ Determining the movement amount per scale for the MPG before hand
When the MPG dial rotates one scale, the coordinate axis moves one step width. There are three
gears (0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.1mm) selectable for the step width. The user can press STEP
REGULATION key to switch among the three gears.
◆ Determining the coordinate axis controlled by the MPG before hand:
Pressing MPG key repeatedly, the user can select one coordinate axis (between X or Z/Y)
controlled by the MPG. The coordinate of the selected axis is highlighted. When the indicator of Y/Z axis
switch lights up, by repeatedly pressing MPG key, the MPG-controlled axis is switched between Y axis
and X axis.
After selecting the coordinate axis to be moved, rotate the MPG to move the selected axis.
Rotating the MPG clockwise moves the coordinate axis in the positive direction. Rotating the MPG
counterclockwise moves the coordinate axis in the negative direction.
【Note】
1) The MPG rotation speed should be less than 5 r/s. If it is exceeded, the motor cannot stop
immediately even if the MPG stops rotating, resulting in the MPG rotating scale differing
from the movement amount of the slide carriage.
2) In MPG mode, neither JOG or STEP movement function, nor the program zero point return
and machine zero point return are valid.
3) In MPG mode, when operating the functions relative to coordinate axis movement, e.g.
when inputting word absolute/incremental movement, the functions relative to the MPG is
forbidden temporarily. In this case, the MPG operation is invalid, with its LED indicator
flicking. After the above-mentioned functions are executed, the MPG functions
43
automatically resumes.
4) When a large override (×0.1 mm gear) is selected, if the MPG is rotated at a high speed, the
slide carriage moves at a high speed. Here, even if the MPG is not rotated, the slide
carriage still keeps moving instead of stopping immediately. The moving distance varies
with the max. motor speed, system acceleration/deceleration time, feedrate and MPG
rotation speed. The higher the max. speed is, and the longer the acceleration/deceleration
time is, and the faster the MPG is rotated, the longer the distance that the slide carriage
Ⅰ
moves before it stops by deceleration, and vice versa.

OPERATION
5) When parameter P400_d4 is set to 0, step width 0.1 is valid; When parameter P400_d4 is set
to 1, step width 0.1 is invalid.
6) When p400_d1 is set to 1, neither the control knob of the external MPG, nor the Y/Z axis
select key and step regulation key are valid.
4.4.1.4 Selecting Rapid Traverse Rate
◆ Selecting manual rapid traverse or low-speed feed state

In Manual state, the speed of each axis in the negative/positive direction can be selected as either
rapid traverse mode or cutting feed (low-speed traverse) mode. By pressing key, the user can
switch the state between manual rapid traverse and manual low-speed feed. That the speed indicator
lights up indicates the rapid traverse state is selected.
◆ Rapid traverse override
There are four gears for the rapid traverse override, which are 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%. Pressing
key once, the override is increased by one gear till 100%. Pressing key once, the
rapid traverse override decreases by one gear till 25%.
In the manual rapid traverse, the actual traverse speed is determined by the rapid traverse rate and
the rapid traverse override.
Actual traverse speed of Z (X, Y) axis = P100 （P101, P102）× rapid traverse override
◆ The manual movement operation affected by rapid traverse override and feedrate override is as
follows:
JOG movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
override; when the indicator goes out, it is affected by feedrate override.
STEP movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
Input word movement operation: When the speed indicator lights up, it is affected by rapid traverse
Program reference point return operation: It is affected by rapid traverse override.
Machine zero point return operation: It is affected by rapid traverse override.
44
【Note】
1) In manual Jog movement mode, first select the rapid traverse override, and then press the axis
movement key.
2) In manual Step movement mode, the user can select the rapid traverse override first, or adjust
the rapid traverse override during movement, with the traverse speed changed accordingly.
4.4.1.5 Selecting Speed for Low-speed Feed
Ⅰ
When the speed indicator goes out by pressing key, the low-speed feed state is
OPERATION
selected.
◆ System built-in feedrate
When the F value of the input word is 0, the system uses the built-in feedrate.
The manual feedrate consists of 16 gears from 0～150% (increment: 10%). The corresponding
feedrate of each gear is as follows:
Feedrate Feedrate（mm/ min ） Feedrate Feedrate（mm/ min）
override override
0% 0 80% 240
10% 7.5 90% 300
20% 22 100% 420
30% 38 110% 525
40% 60 120% 675
50% 82 130% 850
60% 110 140% 1000
70% 180 150% 1260
【Note】
1) There is an error between the speed in the table and the system actual speed. The system
actual speed prevails.
2) When the feedrate override is 0, the system prompts “Feedrate override is 0”; which
indicates the command is being executed, and the slide carriage is in the standstill state.
To cause the slide carriage to move immediately, adjust the feedrate override to a value
other than 0.
◆ Feedrate override
There are 16 gears (0%～150% with an increment of 10%) selectable for the feedrate override; By
pressing key once, the feedrate override increases by one gear till 150%; By pressing
key, the feedrate override decreases by one gear till 0%.
4.4.1.6 Inputting a Word to Move, Setting Feedrate
In Manual operation mode, it is available to move the axes according to the input length and
direction, or to directly move the axes to the input coordinate position from the current position. The
operation methods are as follows:
45
◆ Words relative to movement

The corresponding operation of each axis is:
X axis movement __ X word (position of X axis), or U word (relative movement amount of X axis)
Y axis movement__ Y word (position of Y axis), or V word (relative movement amount of Y axis)
Z axis movement __ Z word (position of Z axis), or W word (relative movement amount of Z axis)
Range of word X, Z, Y, U, W, V: -99999.999mm～99999.999mm；
Ⅰ
Feedrate __ F word (F0000～F4000, the leading zero can be omitted, unit: mm/min)
【Format of movement word】
OPERATION
Z(W)_ F_ ；Z axis moves alone. If F is omitted, the speed is determined by the state of
system rapid traverse/feedrate (the same below).
Y(V)_ F_ ；Y axis moves alone.
Z(W)_ X(U)_ F_ ；Z/X axes move simultaneously.
X(U)_ Y(V)_ F_ ；X/Y axes move simultaneously.
Z(W)_ Y(V)_ F_ ；Z/Y axes move simultaneously.
【Note】
1) In Manual operation mode, up to two axes can move simultaneously, at the selected manual
traverse speed.
2) When Y axis is enabled by setting the system parameter, Y (V) word can be input.
【Example 1】
Input: W Move W -5.2 Enter Run? START (or ESC cancel); this means that Z axis
moves 5.2 mm in the negative direction.
Input: X Move X 40 Enter Run? START (or ESC cancel); this means that X axis moves to
the position of which the coordinate is 40.
【Example 2】
Input: Z200 U50 ; Z axis moves to 200, X moves 50 in the positive direction. F speed is not
specified, so it is determined by the state of rapid traverse/feed.
Input: U20 W-50 F80 ; X axis moves 20 in the positive direction, Z axis moves 50 in the
negative direction. Feedrate is 80, affected by the feedrate override.
Input: F200 ; The feedrate is set to 200. The system is switched to Feed state.
Input: F0 ; The feedrate is set to 0. The system is switched to Feed state and the
built-in speed is used.
◆ Explanations for the movement speed:
1) If word F is not input, when the current speed indicator lights up, the speed is rapid traverse,
which is affected by the rapid override; when the indicator goes out, the speed is low-speed
movement, affected by the feedrate override.
2) If word F is input, the system automatically switches to the low-speed feed state, with the speed
indicator off; Feedrate override gear is the current gear; if the input F value is greater than the
one set in P113, the latter one prevails.
46
3) If the input value of word F is 0, the system uses the built-in feedrate.
4) Both JOG movement operation and STEP movement operation are controlled by word F even if
the speed indicator goes out.
5) If word F is not input, when the indicator goes out, the speed of the low-speed feed is limited by
parameter P113 (max. cutting feedrate); if the speed of the low-speed feed is greater than the
one set in P113, the latter prevails.
Ⅰ
6) If word F is not input, when the indicator goes out and the speed is double-axis low-speed feed,
its movement mode is the interpolation movement mode, which is the same as that in executing
OPERATION
G01 command in AUTO operation mode. The two axes rapid traverse proportionally and stop
proportionally at the same time.
7) If word F is not input, when the indicator lights up, the speed of the single-axis rapid traverse is
determined by parameters P100～P102 (rapid traverse rate) and rapid traverse override.
8) If word F is not input, when the indicator lights up, the movement of the double-axis rapid
traverse is determined by parameter P400_d3, which is the same as that in executing G00
command in Auto operation mode. When bit parameter P400_d3=0, the movement mode is
independent movement mode that each axis rapidly and independently traverses. The resultant
speed displayed on the screen is greater than the max. traverse speed of each axis. When bit
parameter P400_d3=1, the mode is the interpolation movement mode, i.e. the double axes
rapid traverse proportionally and stop proportionally at the same time. The system takes both
movement parameters and slope of the movement line segments into consideration, ensuring
no step out occurs during movement. It is normal that the rapid traverse rate varies with the line
segments with different slopes (priority is given to the axis which moves slower)
9) When the feedrate override is 0, and the system is in the low-speed state or there is word F in
the block, no movement is allowed. After Enter key is pressed, the system prompts Feedrate
override is 0 until the feedrate override is adjusted to another value.
10) Word F is input using G98 command. The system cannot input G99 command.
◆ Calling a word for execution
During the movement by inputting a word, the system automatically saves the latest 8 times of
command record that has been executed.
By pressing key, the system displays a window showing the record list; the operator can call
a record by pressing the numeric keys, and then modify or execute it directly.
4.4.1.7 Drive Unit Enabling Control
Set bit parameter P416_d4 to 1, and press DELETE key twice successively in Manual or Auto mode,
then the servo unit is turned off, and the motor is in the free state. By pressing DELETE key once when
the drive unit is turned off, the unit is turned on, and the motor is in the working state.
4.4.1.8 Alarm Prompts for Coordinate Axis Movement
When operating the axis movement, if the currently moving axis touches the soft limit of tool nose
47
coordinates (tool nose soft limit), the axis stops moving, and the screen displays a corresponding alarm.
If the axis touches the machine coordinate soft limit (mechanical soft limit), the axis can only be moved in
the opposite direction, the axis can only be moved in the opposite direction. However, Manual Zero Point
Return is not restricted by the range of the soft limit.
【Note】
In JOG feed or STEP feed mode, when the movement axis reaches the soft limit, the system
Ⅰ
issues the soft limit alarm. When a command is input to move Z/X axes in input word movement
mode, if the specified value exceeds the range, the system prompts the soft limit alarm and does
OPERATION
not perform execution. Whether the alarm for the machine or tool nose soft limit is valid is set by
parameter P404_d4 or P404_d3 respectively.
4.4.2 Establishing a Coordinate System
4.4.2.1 Establishing Machine Coordinate System—Machine Zero Return (Machine
Reference Point Return)
◆ Machine zero
The machine coordinate system is the reference coordinate system for CNC to calculate the
coordinate position. It is the inherent coordinate system of the machine tool. After the system is installed,
you should establish the machine coordinate system first.
The reference point of the machine coordinate system is referred to as the machine zero. (or
machine reference point, or mechanical zero). For each machine, there is a fixed point taken as the
machine reference point. Each time the machine returns to the machining start point after returning to
machine zero, the error of the machine coordinate system caused by power-off and stepout can be
removed. After unexpected power-off, you can retrieve the machine coordinate system and workpiece
coordinate system by performing zero return, without setting the tool again.
In most cases, the system seeks the machine reference point using the deceleration switch and
zero switch installed on the machine; you can install the deceleration switch only, then use the
one-revolution signal of the servo motor to seek the machine reference point. The deceleration switches
are generally installed on the max. stroke of Z/X axes in the positive direction.
◆ Operations for machine zero return
Press key to cause X axis to perform machine zero return;
Press key to cause Z axis to perform machine zero return.
In Manual operation mode, by pressing key, Z axis rapidly traverses to Z axis machine
zero at the selected rapid traverse rate.
◆ The process of performing zero return by the system is as follows:
48
Zero return mode 1: When there is a deceleration signal and a zero signal, the system performs
execution by mode 1; the procedures of machine zero return are as follows:
Step 1: The axes rapidly traverse at the rapid traverse rate in the specified direction, and
decelerate to stop when the system detects the start point of the deceleration signal
after the deceleration switch is pressed down.
Step 2: The axes traverse at the specified zero return speed in the reverse direction, and
Ⅰ
decelerate to stop when the start point of the deceleration signal is detected.
Step 3: If the specified zero offset is not 0, another zero offset will be moved.
OPERATION
Step 4: The axes continue to move at the specified zero return speed, and then decelerate to
stop when the zero signal is detected.
Step 5: Then the zero return and detection is completed; finally, the system automatically
modifies the machine coordinates of the current point to the “zero position coordinates”
set by the parameter.
Zero return mode 2: When there is no zero signal but only a deceleration signal, the system
performs execution by mode 2.
Compared with mode 1, mode 2 has no zero signals, so step 3 and step 4 are unnecessary;
Only step 1, step 2 and step 5 are required to complete the zero return. However, the precision
of the zero return of this mode is poorer than that of mode 1.
Zero return mode 3: When there is no deceleration signal, but only a zero signal, the system
Compared with mode 1, mode 3 has no deceleration signal, so step 1, step 2 and step 3 are
unnecessary; Only step 4 and step 5 are required to complete the zero return. In this mode, the
operator needs to move the axes to a specified position manually, and then performs the zero
return. Otherwise, the result is incorrect.
Zero return mode 4: Where there is neither a deceleration signal nor a zero signal, the system
If there is no machine zero detection device (including zero switch and deceleration switch)
installed on the machine, set the relative parameter to 0;
If the machine zero return function is performed at this moment, the system does not detect the
zero signal and deceleration signal till the zero coordinate position of the axis is returned to.
【Note】
1) All the axes return to the machine zero in the zero return direction. Therefore, if the “zero
return direction” is set to the positive direction before the zero return, the axes should
stay at the negative direction of the machine zero.
2) During the machine zero return, the rapid traverse rate of the coordinate axis is
restricted by the rapid traverse override.
3) During the machine zero return, the movement of the axis is not restricted by the soft
limit parameters.
4) For the parameters relative to the machine zero return, see Parameter Setting Operation
Mode in Part Ⅱ Programming.
49
5) For the connection and zero return modes of the machine zero return, see Machine Zero
Return and Connection in Part Ⅲ Connection.
6) After the execution of the machine zero return, behind the corresponding machine
coordinates on the screen is displayed the blue icon (indicating the machine zero
return) as a prompt.
Ⅰ
4.4.2.2 Establishing Machine Coordinate System— without Machine Zero (No Machine
OPERATION
Reference Point)
(Note: This operation is invalid for those axes equipped with zero detection devices)
For those axes without zero detection devices (without a deceleration signal and zero signal), the
operations below can be used to create a machine coordinate system.
【Format】
Input: INPUT U New coordinate ENTER. To modify the machine coordinate of X axis to the
new coordinate.
Input: INPUT W New coordinate ENTER. To modify the machine coordinate of Z axis to the
new coordinate.
4.4.2.3 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System
This system employs the floating workpiece coordinate system. The floating workpiece coordinate
system is the reference for the tool setting and relative dimension. After determining the machine
coordinate system, you should set the workpiece coordinate system.
【Format】
Input: INPUT X New coordinate ENTER. To modify the current tool nose coordinate of X axis
to the new coordinate.
Input: INPUT Z New coordinate ENTER. To modify the current tool nose coordinate of Z axis
to the new coordinate.
◆ The procedures of setting workpiece coordinate system are as follows:

Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, then select any tool (in general, the first tool used in the
machining)
1. Set the workpiece coordinate in the X direction:
1) Select an appropriate spindle speed to start the spindle.
2) Move the tool to cut a small step on the trial-cut workpiece, and keep the X axis position
unchanged.
3) Move the tool to a safe position in the Z direction and then stop the spindle. Measure the
diameter of the cut step.
4) Press INPUT key, the screen displays Setting, then press X key, the screen displays Set
50
workpiece coordinate system X; input the measured diameter (input radius if in radius
programming) , press ENTER key, then the system automatically sets the workpiece coordinate
of X axis.
2. Setting the workpiece coordinate in Z axis direction
1) Start the spindle and move the tool to cut an end face on the workpiece. Keep the position of Z
axis unchanged.
Ⅰ
2) Move the tool to a safe position in the X direction, then stop the spindle.
Select a point as the reference point (it is suggested that this point be a fixed point on the
OPERATION
machine, such as the chuck end face or other reference faces, so that the newly established
workpiece coordinate system coincides with the original one after the latter one is broken) .
Measure the distance from the cut end face to the selected reference point in the Z axis
direction.
3) Press ENTER key, the screen displays Setting, then press Z key, the screen displays Set
workpiece coordinate system Z; input the measured data, then press ENTER key, then the
system automatically sets the workpiece coordinate of Z axis.
Note: After the above operations, the establishment of the system workpiece coordinate system is
completed.
【Explanations】
1) The operations of setting the workpiece coordinate system are to modify the tool nose
coordinates of the current point under the condition that the machine coordinates and tool
compensation are not changed. The result of the operation is equal to that after resetting the
offset amount between workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system.
2) In general, the operations of setting the workpiece coordinate system are performed once after
the system initialization, or after the replacement of the workpiece type (when all the tool
compensation values are cleared). It is unnecessary to set the workpiece coordinate system
afterwards.
【Note】
When the actual position of the tool is inconsistent with the one of the workpiece coordinate
system due to the step out caused by some special causes, it is inappropriate to use the method
of resetting the workpiece coordinate system, because both workpiece coordinate system and
machine coordinate system are changed after step-out. In this case, if only the workpiece
coordinate system is corrected, without correcting the machine coordinate system, an
unexpected “machine coordinate soft limit alarm” may occur.
After the motor is out of step, the appropriate operations are as follows:
1) Choose a reference point for tool setting (a position easy for the tool nose to reach and
easy to observe), and measure Z and X coordinates of this point;
2) Move the tool nose to a reference point (the coordinates of the reference point are known)
3) If the coordinates of the tool nose are inconsistent with those of the reference point,
press DELETE key twice successively to turn off the drive unit;
51
4) Input word movement to make the tool nose coordinates consistent with the reference
point coordinates (the coordinates are changed without changing actual tool nose);
5) Press DELETE key again to turn on the drive unit.
After the above operations, both the machine coordinate system and the workpiece
coordinate system are corrected.
4.4.2.4 Setting Program Reference Point

Ⅰ
In the machine coordinate system, the operator should determine a position. When the tool nose
OPERATION
stays at this position, it is safe and convenient to change the tool and clamp the workpiece. When the
tool post stays at this position to set the program reference point, this position is referred to as the
program reference point (or program zero point). The coordinates of the program reference point are
relative to the machine coordinate system.
【Format】
By pressing INPUT key, the screen displays Setting; then by pressing 0 key, the screen displays
Set program reference point? ; here, press ENTER key to confirm this point as the program reference
point of Z/X/Y axes.
If the workpiece coordinate system is reset after setting the program reference point, the
coordinates of the original reference point is unchanged in the new workpiece coordinate system. In this
case, reset the program reference point. The initial values of the program reference point are X=150
Z=200.
After setting the program reference point, both the operations of program reference point return
command (G26) and program zero point return using keys on the system operation panel return to this
point, regardless of where the slide carriage is.
4.4.2.5 Program Reference Point Return
Before performing program reference point return, the operator must determine the position
of the program reference point. Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
In Manual operation mode, perform this operation by directly pressing function keys. After pressing
the keys, the corresponding axes rapidly return to the program reference point. When the axis change
indicator lights up, the operation is for Y axis.
By pressing key, X axis rapidly returns to the program reference point from the current
point.
By pressing key, Z axis rapidly returns to the program reference point from the current
point.
【Note】
1) When waiting for machining, each axis should stay at the program reference point generally.
52
2) After performing program reference point return, the green icon for the program reference
point return is displayed as a prompt before the corresponding machine coordinates on the
screen.
4.4.2.6 Recovering Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point
In Manual operation mode, the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point have
Ⅰ
been set. If the blocks containing G50 command are executed in Auto operation mode, the workpiece
OPERATION
coordinate system and program reference point are changed. With the following operations, the
operator can recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in the Manual
operation mode.
【Format】
Key in: G 5 1 ENTER , to recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference
point set in the Manual operation mode
4.4.3 Spindle Control Function
4.4.3.1 Spindle Start/Stop Control
◆ Spindle Start/Stop Operation

In Manual operation mode, it is available to control spindle CW rotation, CCW rotation and spindle
stop by directly pressing the function keys on the panel or by keying in M03/M04/M05 command
(Feed/Spindle hold knob is invalid in Manual operation mode).
Press key, or key in M 3 ENTER ; the spindle rotates in CW direction. The screen
displays the state of the spindle, and the LED indicator on the key lights up.
Press key, or key in M 5 ENTER ; the spindle stops.
Press key, or key in M 4 ENTER ; the spindle rotates in CCW direction. The screen
displays the state of the spindle, and the LED indicator on the key lights up.
◆ Spindle JOG control
It is available to switch to the spindle JOG control using the spindle stop key.
When the spindle stops, by pressing key, the system switches to the spindle JOG control
state, highlighting the spindle state icon on the screen. By pressing the key once again, the
system switches to the normal state. In the spindle JOG control state, by pressing or
key, the spindle rotates for a specified period of time at the specified speed and then stops. (If the
53
specified time is too long, you can also press key to stop it). When the spindle is in the JOG
state, the spindle control commands M03, M04, M05 input by MDI are invalid. The spindle JOG speed is
set by parameter P309, and the JOG rotation time by parameter P308. After the JOG time is up, the
spindle stops automatically, with the LED indicator on the key OFF.
◆ Interlock relationship between spindle start/stop and chuck:
When P402_d5=0, the interlock relationship between hydraulic chuck control and spindle control is
Ⅰ
as follows:
OPERATION
1) When the chuck is not clamped, it is forbidden to start the spindle; otherwise, “Chuck is not
clamped, spindle start forbidden” is issued.
2) When the spindle is rotating, it is forbidden to operate the chuck; otherwise, “Spindle is not
stopped, chuck operation forbidden” is issued.
◆ Interlock relationship between spindle start/stop and tailstock:
When P402_d3=0, the interlock relationship between tailstock control and spindle control is as
follows:
When the spindle is rotating, it is forbidden to operate the tailstock; otherwise, “Spindle is not
stopped, tailstock operation forbidden” is issued.
◆ Spindle start/stop execution and signal output time sequence:
Note: Select the spindle control output signal by parameter P410_d7. When P410_d7 is set to 0, it is the spindle
control level output. When P410_d7 is set to 1, it is spindle control pulse output. The time sequence
relationship between spindle brake signal MSP and spindle start/stop signal is as follows:
1） In pulse control mode, the output time sequence of M3, M4, M5, MSP:
Executing M03 Executing M04 ExecutingM05
M03 pin t1
M04 pin t1
t1 t1
M05 pin
t2
MSP brake pin t3
2） In level control mode, output time sequence of M3, M4, M5, MSP (here, M5 pin does not output, which can be
used for other purpose):
Executing M03 Executing M04 Executing M05
M03 pin
t2
M04 pin
t2
MSP brake pin t3
54
t1: Hold time output by signal M3, M4, M5 in the pulse control mode, set by parameter P326;
t2: Spindle stop brake delay time, set by parameter P315;
t3: Hold time output by spindle brake signal MSP, set by parameter P316.
4.4.3.2 Spindle S Command – Gear Shift Control
Ⅰ
(Note: Those users who employ a variable frequency spindle are not required to read this section.)
If the machine is not equipped with a variable frequency spindle, set parameter P410_d6 to 0, in
OPERATION
order to use S function to shift the spindle gear. The standard format of word S consists of an S and a
two-digit number, which indicates the spindle gear number.
【Format of S code】
Sx ；
Sxx ；
【Example】
Select the second gear speed of the spindle:
Key in: S 0 2 ENTER ; the system outputs S02 signal, and the screen displays gear state S02.
【Explanations】
1) When parameter P410_d5 is set to 0, the gear control signal is directly output by the bit, and
the range of S code is S00～S04. Each gear signal corresponds to one output point. S0 means
all the outputs are invalid.
2) When parameter P410_d5 is set to 1, the gear control signal is the coded output, and the range
of S code is S00～S15. The coded output is as follows:
Code
S00 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15
Output
point
S01 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S02 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S03 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S04 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
Note: “★” in the table indicates that the output of the corresponding output point is valid.
3) The line number controlled by the actual output of the spindle gear is set by parameter P310.
P310=4, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03, S04;
P310=3, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03; S04 is released, which can be
used for other purpose;
P310=2, the actual output control points are S01, S02; S04, S03 are released, which can be
P310=1, the actual output control point is S01; S04, S03, S02 are released, which can be used
for other purpose;
55
P310=0，S code does not output; S04, S03, S02, S01 are released, which can be used for other
purpose;
4) During the coded output of the gear control signal (parameter P410_d5 is set to 1), if the control
lines specified by parameter P310 are less than 4, only the low-gear control lines are valid, the
high-gear ones are not output. Thus the high-gear coded control lines are released, which are
not affected by the gear control.
Ⅰ
◆ Gear shift execution of spindle S commands and signal output time sequence:
At system power on, the default is S00, and S01～S04 are invalid. When executing any one of S01,
OPERATION
S02, S03, S04, the corresponding S signal output is valid and retained, while the other three S signal
outputs are cancelled. When executing S00 command, the outputs of S01～S04 are cancelled. Only one
of S01～S04 is valid at a time.
Executing S01 Executing S02 Executing S00
S01 pin
t1
S02 pin
t1: Interval time for spindle gear shift (P313).
◆ Function key operation for spindle gear shift

In addition to the above method of executing spindle gear shift, the operator can also change the
spindle gear by pressing spindle gear shift key .
By pressing key once, the spindle speed is output in the order of S01～S04 or S00～S15
(coded output) recurrently. If there is only the four-gear spindle speed, you need to press key
three times to switch the gear to S01 from S02.
4.4.3.3 Spindle S Command— Rotating Speed Control
(Note: Those users who do not employ a variable frequency spindle are not required to read this
section.)
If the machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle, set parameter P410_d6 to 1. To solve
the problem that the frequency converter has insufficient torque at a low speed, the system is provided
with four levels of automatic gear shift output signal. With the converter working in a high frequency, the
machine obtains a higher cutting torque at a lower speed. The system uses M41/M42/M43/M44
command for the spindle gear control; and uses S code for the rotation speed control.
◆ Gear Control of the Variable Frequency Spindle

【Format】
56
M41 ；
M42 ；
M43 ；
M44 ；
【Explanations】
1) M41, M42, M43, M44 output the gear control signals. Each gear signal corresponds to one
Ⅰ
output point of S01, S02, S03, S04 respectively.
OPERATION
2) The control lines of the actual output of the spindle gear is set by parameter P310.
P310=4, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03, S04;
P310=3, the actual output control points are S01, S02, S03; S04 is released, which can be
P310=2, the actual output control points are S01, S02; S04, S03 are released, which can be
P310=1, the actual output control point is S01; S04, S03, S02 are released, which can be
P310=0, the actual output control points do not output; S04, S03, S02, S1 are released,
which can be used for other purpose;
3) The initial gear at system power on is M41.
【Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle M gear shifting:】
At CNC power on, whether the spindle gear is memorized is controlled by parameter P400_d6
(spindle gear memory):
1) When the parameter is set to 0, the spindle gear is not memorized at power on after power off.
The default is the first spindle gear, and M41～M44 have no output.
2) When the parameter is set to 1, the spindle gear is memorized at power on after power off.
If the specified gear is consistent with the current one, no gear shift is performed. If the specified
gear is inconsistent with the current one, the process of gear shift is as follows:
① Execute any one of M41, M42, M43 and M44 commands, and output the analog voltage to the
spindle servo or frequency converter according to the value (unit: mv) set by data parameter
P314 (the voltage output during spindle gear shift);
② After delaying the time set in data parameter P311 (gear shift time 1 of the variable frequency
spindle), turn off the output signal of the original gear;
③ After delaying P313 (gear switch interval of the variable frequency spindle), output the new gear
shift signal;
④ When the system is connected to the detection of gear shift in-position signals M41I, M42I,
M43I, M44I; If the gear shift is not in-position, the CNC does not proceeds to the next step until
the gear shift in-position signal is detected; when the system is not connected to the detection
of gear shift in-position signals, it directly proceed s to the next step; M41I～M44I input signals
are defined in the interface parameters.
57
⑤ After delaying data parameter P312 (gear shift time 2 of the variable frequency spindle), output
the spindle analog voltage by the value set in data parameters P300～P303 (corresponding to
gears 1~4 respectively) according to the current gear, to complete the gear shift.
◆ Rotating speed control of the variable frequency spindle
If the machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle, control the spindle speed using S
commands. The standard format of S command consists of an S and a 4-digit number. The two-digit
Ⅰ
number indicates the spindle gear number. There two ways to input spindle speed:
1) S sets the fixed speed of the spindle (r/min); the spindle speed keeps unchanged if S value is
OPERATION
not changed, which is referred to as constant rotation speed control.

2) S sets the surface speed (m/min) of the tool nose relative to the outer circle of the workpiece,
which is referred to as constant surface speed control. In constant surface speed control mode,
the spindle speed varies with the coordinate of X axis during cutting feed. See “Constant Speed
Control G96, Constant Speed Control Cancel G97 ” in PartⅡ Programming.
【Code format】
G96 ； Setting the constant surface speed cutting state；

G96 S__ ； Setting the constant surface speed cutting state and specifying the value of
the surface speed; range: 0～9999 m /min;
G97 ； Cancelling the constant surface speed state; G97 is a modal command;
G97 S__ ； Cancelling the constant surface speed state and specifying the value of the
rotating speed；range：0～9999 r /min；
S__ ； The type of speed depends on the current state; it is either rotating speed
value or constant surface value.
【Example】
Key in: S 2 0 0 ENTER ; the system converts the rotating speed to the analog voltage of 0~10
V and outputs it to the frequency converter via the output interface.
【Explanations】
1) When executing the S command, the system calculates the analog voltage corresponding to the
rotating speed taking the max. spindle speed of the current spindle gear as a reference, and
then outputs it to the spindle servo or frequency converter.
2) In order to keep the spindle actual speed and the speed set by the S command the same, the
actual max. spindle speed for each gear should be set by parameters P300～P303 (when the
output analog voltage is 10 V); Setting method: First input S__ according to the setting values
of parameters P300～P303, then modify the setting of parameters P300～P303 according to the
spindle speed displayed by the system.
3) The analog voltage is 0 V at system power on. After executing S command, the system outputs
a corresponding voltage; then the voltage keeps unchanged (unless it is in the cutting feed state
of constant surface speed control and the coordinate of X axis is changed). After executing S0,
58
the analog voltage output is 0V. The analog voltage output remains unchanged at CNC reset
and emergency stop.
4.4.4 Coolant Control
In Manual operation mode, the coolant ON/OFF operations can be controlled by directly pressing
Ⅰ
the function keys on the panel or inputting M08/M09 command.
OPERATION
By pressing key, the coolant operation is switched between ON and OFF; The state icon
on the screen, and the LED indicator on the key indicate corresponding states. When the coolant is ON,
the LED indicator lights up; when the coolant is OFF, the indicator goes out.
Key in: M 8 ENTER; the coolant is ON.
Key in: M 9 ENTER ; the coolant is OFF.
1) Output time sequence of M8, M9 in level control mode: (M9 pin does not output, which can be
used for other purpose)
Executing M08 Executing M09
M08 pin
2) Output time sequence of M8, M9 in pulse control mode:
Executing M08 Executing M09
M08 pin t1
M09 pin
t1
t1: Hold time of M08, M09 signal output in pulse control mode, set by parameter P326.
P410_d7: When it is set to 1, the coolant is controlled by the system pulse output; when it is set to
0, the coolant is controlled by the system level output. This parameter is shared by the spindle control
output parameter.
4.4.5 Manual Tool Change Control
In Manual operation mode, the tool change control can be performed by directly pressing the tool
change function key on the panel or inputting T function commands.
◆ Operation of tool change function key
By pressing key once, the tool post rotates to the next tool number, which will be displayed
on the screen (if parameter P403_d5 is set to “confirmation” required, press ENTER key afterwards.)
59
◆ Input format of T function command

The standard format of the tool function word in this system includes a T and a 4-digit number. The
first two digits indicates the tool number, and the last two digits indicates the tool offset number. It is not
required that all the four digits be input. The operator can use 2~4 digits depending on the conditions.
【Format】
Txx ____ The first digit means the tool number, and the second number means the tool offset
Ⅰ
number；
Txxx ____ The first digit means the tool number, and the second two digits means the tool
OPERATION
offset number;
Txxxx ____ The first two digits means the tool number, the last two digits means the tool offset
number.
【Explanations】
The range of the tool number is determined by parameter P319 (Max. tool number: 1~16); if P319
is 4, the tool number can be 0~4. If the tool number input is 0, the current tool number is maintained.);
Range of tool offset number: 0~64; if the input tool offset number is 0, the tool offset is cancelled.
【Example】
Key in： T 4 6 Enter ；Changing to tool number 4, and executing tool offset number 6
Key in： T 3 0 Enter ；Changing to tool number 3, and cancelling tool offset
Key in： T 0 6 Enter ；Maintaining the current tool number, and executing tool offset
number 6
Key in： T 8 1 2 Enter ； Changing to tool number 8, and executing tool offset number 12
Key in： T 4 0 5 Enter ；Changing to tool number 4, and executing tool offset number 5
Key in： T 0 6 0 8 Enter ；Changing to tool number 6, and executing tool offset number 8
Key in： T 0 0 Enter ；No tool changing, and canceling tool offset
Key in： T 0 4 0 Enter ；Maintaining the current tool number, and executing tool offset
number 40
【Note】
1) Example: Inputting T400 means changing to tool number 4 and cancelling the tool offset. (Note:
T400 cannot be input as T040 here.)
2) If the electric tool post malfunctions, the system displays the alarm message “Tool number
signal detection overtime” on the screen, which indicates that the corresponding tool number
cannot be found within a specified period of time.
3) The CNC system employs the absolute tool change mode, so the position of each tool number is
fixed on the tool post when an electric tool post is used. Make sure the tool number where the
tool post is located is the same as that displayed on the screen during installation and
debugging.
60
4) When parameter P318 is set to 0, the selected tool post is the line-up tool post, which does not
output the tool change signal during tool change.
5) The tool offset can be executed by moving the slide carriage or modifying the coordinate system.
It is set by parameter P403_d6.
When P403_d6 is set to 1, the slide carriage is moved without changing the coordinates during
tool offset execution.
Ⅰ
When P403_d6 is set to 0, the coordinates displayed are modified without moving the slide
carriage during tool offset execution.
OPERATION
6) If the tool change fails or it is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system assumes that
the tool is in an uncertain position, and keeps the tool number flicking read as an prompt. In this
case, the machining program cannot be started; Only by performing a successfully tool change
or powering on the system after power off, can the system recover to the normal state.
7) During tool change, if the target tool number is the current one, only the tool offset is changed
without performing tool change output action, with the exception of the following two cases:
● After tool change fails, the tool number is flicking red on the screen, which means the tool
number displayed is not necessarily the same as the actual tool number. If the target tool
number in the tool change command to be executed next time is the current tool number, the
system executes one tool change action.
● During the first tool change after system power on, if the target tool number is the current tool
number displayed on the screen, the system executes one tool change action.
◆ Execution process and signal output sequence time of T function command:
The system is provided with multiple tool change modes. For details, please refer to Section 3.4
“Tool Change Control Function and Connection” in Part Ⅲ Connection in this manual.
4.4.6 Manual Tool Change
In general, it is necessary to use different tools to machine a workpiece. Since the tool installation
and tool dimension are different, the position where the tool nose of a tool is located does not coincide
with others when the tool is rotated to the cutting position. In such a case, there exists an offset.
Tool setting is used for the system to automatically store the offset to the specified tool offset
number.
After tool setting, the user can edit the part program according to the workpiece drawing and
machining technique by specifying the corresponding tool offset number in the tool change command of
the program, regardless of the difference between the tools.
The tool offset list of the system is capable of storing 64 groups of tool offset from number 1~64,
with each offset number corresponding to one group. For each group, five items, i.e. Z offset, X offset,
tool radius, imaginary tool nose number, tool setting record are recorded (see Tool Offset Operation
Mode).
Through tool setting, the system modifies Z offset, X offset and tool setting record in the tool offset
number specified by the user. However, the other two items, the tool radius and imaginary tool number,
61
should be input in advance, because the system needs to reference to these two items during tool
setting. Otherwise, unexpected results may occur (if the tool is not ball-shape, both the two items should
be set to 0 in advance. For details, see Tool Offset Operation Mode).
Tool setting record item means the system automatically records the tool number when the number
is set to the tool offset number. For safety reasons, the system will scan the machining program using
tool setting record. E.g. the T command is T0409 during tool setting, but the machining program includes
T0309, so it is inconsistent with the tool setting record. It is highly dangerous in this case, and the system
Ⅰ
prompts an alarm message.

OPERATION
【Precautions before tool setting】
1) According to the above description, determine the offset number where the system stores the
offset value in advance , and determine the contents of the imaginary tool nose item of the offset
number in advance.
2) For the same tool nose, only Z offset and X offset can be stored to the same offset number.
Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
3) In general, it is recommended that tool number 1 use offset number 1, and tool number 2 use
tool offset number 2 for convenience.
4) It is suggested that the operator execute the offset number first, and then perform tool setting,
making the operation visible. E.g. if the offset value in tool number 4 needs to be stored to offset
number 9, first execute T49 command.
5) The tool setting must be performed on the condition that the workpiece coordinate system is
normal. Otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur.
The system is provided with trial-cut tool setting and fixed-point tool setting, which can be chosen by the
user. The explanations for them are as follows:
◆ Trial-cut tool setting (method 1):
【Format】
Key in: I Measured value ENTER [Tool offset number] Enter. To modify the current tool
nose coordinate of X axis to the new coordinate.
Key in: K Measured value ENTER [Tool offset number] Enter. To modify the current tool
nose coordinate of Z axis to the new coordinate.
【The procedures for trial-cut tool setting are as follows:】
After fixing the workpiece on the machine, the user can perform tool setting to any tool with the
above method till all the tools are set. This operation is convenient and quick when a tool is abraded or
needs to be adjusted.
(1) Tool setting in X direction:
1) Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, and select any tool (select the first tool used in the
machining generally).
2) Select an appropriate spindle speed, and start the spindle. Move the tool to cut a step along
the workpiece surface in Manual operation mode.
62
3) Without moving X axis, move the tool to a safe position in Z direction and stop the spindle.
Measure the diameter of the cut step.
4) By pressing I key, the screen displays Tool setting X; Input the diameter measured, then
press ENTER key.
5) The system prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets an offset
number. If this offset number is the same as the one to be input, press ENTER key directly.
Ⅰ
Otherwise, press ENTER key after inputting the offset number. The system then
automatically calculates the tool offset value of X axis and stores it to the specified offset
OPERATION
number.
(2) Tool setting in Z direction:
1) Start the spindle again, move the tool to cut an end face along the workpiece surface.
2) Without moving Z axis, move the tool to a safe position in X direction and stop the spindle.
3) Select a point as the reference point, measure the distance from the cut end face to the
selected reference point in Z direction.
4) By pressing K key, the screen displays Tool setting Z; input the measured data, then press
ENTER key.
automatically calculates the tool offset value of Z axis and stores it to the specified offset
number.
◆ Trial-cut tool setting (method 2):
【The procedures are as follows:】
(1) Tool setting in X direction:
1) Fix the trial-cut workpiece on the machine, and then select any tool (select the first tool used
in the machining generally).
2) Select an appropriate spindle speed, and start the spindle. Move the tool to cut a step along
the workpiece surface in Manual operation mode.
3) Without moving X axis, by pressing key, the system automatically memorizes the
tool nose position, with tool setting icon flickering on the screen; then move the tool out
of X axis to a safe position and stop the spindle. Measure the diameter of the step measured.
4) By pressing I key, the screen displays Tool setting X; input the measured diameter, then
press ENTER key.
automatically calculates the tool offset value of X axis and stores it to the specified offset
number; the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon as well.
63
(2) Tool setting in Z direction:

1) Start the spindle again, move the tool to cut an end face along the workpiece surface.
2) Without moving Z axis, by pressing key, the system automatically memorizes the tool
nose position, with tool setting icon flickering on the screen; then move the tool out of Z
axis to a safe position and stop the spindle.
Ⅰ
3) Select a point as the reference point, measure the distance from the cut end face to the selected
OPERATION
reference point in Z direction.

4) By pressing K key, the screen displays Tool setting Z; input the measured data, then press
ENTER key. The system then prompts Confirm tool offset No.: XX; and automatically presets
an offset number. If this offset number is the same as the one to be input, press ENTER key
directly. Otherwise, press ENTER key after inputting the offset number. The system then
automatically calculates the tool offset value of Z axis and stores it to the specified offset
number; the system automatically cancels the tool setting icon as well.
【Explanations】
1) When the tool setting icon is flickering, it is available to perform operations such as spindle
start/stop, coordinate axis movement; if tool setting is performed, the system automatically
cancels the tool setting icon, and does not memorize the original tool setting point.
2) If K or I is directly pressed without the tool setting icon appearing, the system assumes the
current point as the tool setting point.
◆ Fixed-point tool setting:
After determining a reference point on the machine (or on the workpiece), first set a group of
coordinates (Z, X) for the point by means of actual measurement or using other methods. Then move all
the tool noses to this reference point to obtain this group of coordinates, with the system memorizing the
tool offsets automatically. This type of tool setting is called the fix-point tool setting. I.e. first execute
“Input reference point coordinates” or “Modify reference point coordinates” to determine the reference
point coordinates; then move the tool nose to the reference point and execute “Fixed-point tool setting”
to complete the tool setting.
【Fix-point tool setting by pressing hp1 key】
1) Inputting the reference point coordinates:
It means inputting the current tool nose coordinates as the coordinates of the reference point; in
general, this method is applied when the coordinates of the reference point is unknown, but the tool nose
coordinates of the current tool is considered as correct. Move the tool nose to the reference point, and
then execute “Input reference point coordinates” to complete the input operation. After that, the system
automatically stores the current tool nose coordinates as the coordinates of the reference point. If a tool
is broken or needs to be re-mounted, select any tool which has been set as the reference.
2) Modifying the reference point coordinates:
Input the coordinates of Z/X reference point, then press ENTER key to complete the modification of
the reference point coordinates; in general, this method is applied when the coordinates of the reference
point is known.
64
3) Fixed-point tool setting:

Move the tool to be set to the reference point, and execute “Fixed-point tool setting”, then press
ENTER key to complete the tool setting of the current tool. The system will automatically generate the
tool offset.
【Note】
1) If using an optical tool setting gauge, the user can set the tool setting point at the
Ⅰ
intersection of the reticle of the gauge without starting the spindle; the other operations
are the same.
OPERATION
2) The tool offset automatically generated by the system can be viewed and modified in the
tool offset operation mode. See Tool Offset Operation Mode.
3) When using the line-up tool, if the tool is located at the other side of the workpiece, the
measured value in the X direction input during trial-cut tool setting should be negative.
4.4.7 Hydraulic Chuck Control Function
◆ Chuck operation
In Manual operation mode, key in M10/M11 command to control the chuck clamping/releasing
Key in: M 1 0 ENTER ; the chuck is clamped. The screen displays the spindle state.
Key in: M 1 1 ENTER ; the chuck is released.
Key in: M 1 2 ENTER ; the chuck control signal is cancelled. (M12 is used for some special
chuck devices)
When parameter P409_d7 is set to 0, the system has hydraulic chuck control function.
When P402_d5=0, there is an interlock relationship between hydraulic chuck control and spindle
control.
When P402_d4=0, the chuck response signal consecutive detection is turned off.
When P402_d4=1, the chuck response signal consecutive detection is turned on.
When P409_d6=0, the hydraulic chuck is the outer chuck mode.
When P409_d6=1, the hydraulic chuck is in the inner chuck mode.
When P409_d5=1, the hydraulic chuck requires the response detection; the response signal is
green when it is normal, and is yellow when it is abnormal.
When P409_d5=0, the hydraulic chuck does not require the response detection.
When P409_d3=0, the hydraulic chuck control signal is level control;
When P409_d3=1, the hydraulic chuck control signal is pulse control; the pulse width is set by
parameter P327.
When P409_d1=0, the footswitch input of the hydraulic chuck is valid;
When P409_d1=1, the footswitch of the hydraulic chuck is invalid
◆ Execution of chuck commands

In the outer chuck mode, after executing M10 command, the system outputs the chuck clamping
signal from M10 pin (Whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is selected by a parameter), then
65
the chuck clamping action is completed when the response detection signal is not needed; If the
response detection is needed, the system waits until the chuck clamping is in-position. If the chuck
clamping signal (interface pin RM10 is low level, and RM11 is high level) is detected within the specified
period of time (set by parameter P329: M command response detection time specification), the chuck
clamping action is completed; otherwise, the alarm “Chuck clamping response detection overtime” is
issued.
Ⅰ
After executing M11 command, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from pin M11
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is selected by a parameter). If the response detection
OPERATION
signal is not required, the chuck releasing action is completed. If the response detection signal is
required, the system waits until the chuck clamping is in-position. After the chuck releasing in-position
signal (interface pin RM11 is low level, and RM10 is high level) is detected, the chuck releasing action is
completed. Otherwise, the alarm “Chuck releasing response detection overtime” is issued.
In the inner chuck mode，after executing M10 command, the system outputs the chuck clamping
signal from pin M11; after executing M11 command, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from
pin M10. Therefore, only the output pins are opposite to those of the outer chuck mode, and the others
are the same.
In addition to controlling the hydraulic chuck with commands, the user can also control it with an
external footswitch. By pedaling the footswitch once, the system switches between clamping and
releasing once according to the control mode of the clamping/releasing command M10/M11. Before
switching to Manual or Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the chuck footswitch be
released (disconnected). Otherwise, the system issues an alarm of abnormality.
◆ Output time sequence of hydraulic chuck control signal:

Input signal
t1 t1
M10 pin
M11 pin t1
t1: M10, M11 signal output hold time in pulse control mode, set by parameter P327;
2) Output time sequence of M10, M11 in level control mode:
M10 pin
M11 pin
66
【Note】
1) When the hydraulic chuck function is valid, the system is in the chuck releasing state by default
after power on or emergency stop; When the first hydraulic chuck footswitch input is valid, the
system outputs the chuck clamping signal.
2) When there is an interlock relationship between chuck and spindle: it is forbidden to operate the
Ⅰ
chuck during spindle running, or an alarm occurs; it is forbidden to start the spindle in the chuck
releasing state, or an alarm occurs.
OPERATION
3) The operation of the footswitch is invalid during automatic continuous execution, regardless of
whether the spindle is running or not.
4) If the operation of the chuck fails or is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system
assumes that the chuck is at an uncertain position, and displays a red flicker, prompting the
chuck state (M10 or M11). In this case, it is unavailable to start the machining program; only by
performing a successful chuck operation or powering on the system after power off, can the
system recover to the normal state.
5) Chuck response signal consecutive detection (bit parameter P409_d5=1) is to continue
detecting whether there is abnormal releasing occurring in the normal state or machining state.
6) When the chuck signal is cancelled (in M12 state), there is an underscore being displayed under
the chuck state (M10 or M11), i.e. M10 or M11 are displayed.
4.4.8 Hydraulic Tailstock Control Function
◆ Tailstock operation
In Manual operation mode, key in M78/M79 command to control tailstock advancing/retracting
Key in: M 7 8 Enter ; The tailstock advances.
Key in: M 7 9 Enter ; The tailstock retracts.
Key in: M 8 0 Enter ; The tailstock control signal is cancelled. (M80 is used for some special
tailstock devices)
When parameter P409_d4 is set to 0, the system has the hydraulic tailstock control function.
When P402_d3=0, there is an interlock relationship between hydraulic tailstock control and spindle
control.
When P402_d2=0, the hydraulic tailstock response signal consecutive detection is off;
When P402_d2=1, the hydraulic tailstock response signal consecutive detection is on.
When P409_d2=0, the hydraulic tailstock control signal is level control.
When P409_d2=1, the hydraulic tailstock control signal is pulse control; the pulse width is
determined by the time set in parameter P328.
When P409_d0=0, the footswitch input of the hydraulic tailstock is valid;
When P409_d0=1, the footswitch input of the hydraulic tailstock is invalid;
67
◆ Execution process and signal output time sequence of tailstock commands:

If the detection of the tailstock in-position signal is required, define pin RM78 or RM79 in interface
parameter P519 or P520.
After executing M78 command, the system outputs the tailstock advancing signal from pin M78
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is set by the parameter); then the tailstock advancing
action is completed; if the response detection signal is required, the system waits for the tailstock
advancing in-position signal. After the tailstock advancing in-position signal (interface pin RM78 is low
Ⅰ
level, and RM79 is high level) is detected within a specified period of time (set by parameter P329: M
OPERATION
command response detection time specification), the operation is completed; otherwise, the alarm
“Tailstock advancing in-position response detection overtime” is issued.
After executing M79 command, the system outputs the tailstock retracting signal from pin M79
(whether to output a pulse signal or level signal is set by the parameter), then the tailstock retracting
action is completed; if the response detection signal is required, the system waits for the tailstock
retracting in-position signal. After the tailstock retracting in-position signal (interface pin RM79 is low
level, and RM78 is high level) is detected within a specified period of time, the operation is completed;
otherwise, the alarm “Tailstock retracting in-position detection overtime” is issued.
In addition to controlling the hydraulic tailstock with commands, the user can also control the
tailstock with an external footswitch. By pedaling the footswitch once, the system switches between
tailstock advancing and retracting once according to the control mode of the tailstock
advancing/retracting command M78/M79.
Before switching to Manual or Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the
tailstock footswitch be released (disconnected); otherwise, the system issues an abnormality alarm.
Input signal
t1 t1
M78 pin
M79 pin t1
t1: Signal M78, M79 output hold time in pulse control mode, set by parameter P328;
2) Output time sequence of M78, M79 in level control mode:
M78 pin
M79 pin
68
【Note】
1) When the hydraulic tailstock function is valid, the system is in the tailstock retracting state by
default after power on or emergency stop; When the first hydraulic tailstock footswitch input is
valid, the system outputs the tailstock advancing signal.
2) When there is an interlock relationship between tailstock and spindle: it is forbidden to operate
the tailstock during spindle running, or an alarm occurs.
3) The tailstock control input is invalid during automatic continuous execution, regardless of
Ⅰ
whether the spindle is running or not.
4) If the operation of the tailstock fails or is interrupted (by reset, emergency stop), the system
OPERATION
assumes that the tailstock is at an uncertain position, and displays a red flicker, prompting the
tailstock state (M10 or M11). In this case, it is unavailable to start the machining program; only by
performing a successful tailstock operation or powering on the system after power off, can the
system recover to the normal state.
5) Tailstock response signal consecutive detection (set by parameters P519, P520) indicates the
system continues detecting whether the tailstock is released abnormally in the normal state or
machining state. If the function is set to alarm (bit parameter P402_d2=1), the program
machining is stopped and the spindle is turned off when the tailstock is released during
machining.
6) When the tailstock signal is cancelled (in M80 state), there is an underscore displayed under the
tailstock state (M78 or M79), i.e. M78 or M79.
4.4.9 Other Option Functions
The option function is the non-standard pin input/output control function.

If a function is required, it is necessary to define its pin in the interface parameters and correctly
connect the lines. For details on the definitions of interface parameters, refer to Section 4.6 Parameter
Operation Mode; For details on the connection, refer to Chapter Three “CNC Device Connection” in Part
Ⅲ Connection.
【Warning】
The definition of pins must be accomplished by the machine tool builder because incorrect
definition may cause damage to the system and the machine tool electric.
4.4.9.1 Triple-color Indicator Control
If the function is required, define its output pin in the interface parameters and correctly connect the
lines; the system will output a signal at the corresponding pin.
P502：LMP3：Green light (program execution signal light 3)；
P503：LMP2：Yellow light（program execution signal light 2）；
P504：LMP1：Red light，alarm light（alarm light control signal 1）.
【Function description】
1) The triple-color indicator is valid in Manual/Auto operation mode; in other operation modes, it is
invalid.
2) During program execution, if the green light lights up, it indicates the normal operation.
69
3) If an alarm occurs, the green light goes out, and the red light lights up.
4) When the execution of the program is stopped, and no alarm occurs, the red and green lights
go out, while the yellow light lights up.
4.4.9.2 Lubricant Control

Ⅰ
If the function is required, define its output pin in the interface parameters, and connect the lines
correctly; the system will output the signal at the corresponding pin.
OPERATION
P506：M32O: Lubricant control output signal

1) Non-auto lubrication
When P330 is set to 0: the lubrication is non-automatic. The lubricant ON/OFF is controlled with
commands.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, Lubricant ON/OFF command M32/M33 is valid if input.
After executing M32, the lubricant output is ON; after executing M33, the lubricant output is
OFF.
2) Automatic lubrication:
When P330 is set to 0: Automatic timing lubrication.
Lubrication start time and lubrication interval are settable. After the system is powered on, the
system starts the lubrication and lasts a period of time set by P330, then stops output; after delaying
the time set by P331, the system outputs lubricant again, and so on.
【Note】
If the system enables the automatic lubrication function, the values of parameter P330 and P331
should be greater than 1s. If the values are smaller than 1s, they are processed as 1s.
4.4.9.3 Machine Electricity Delay Power-on Control
correctly; the system outputs the signal at the corresponding pin.
P505：MDLY: Machine electricity delay power-on control signal.
If the machine electricity delay power-on control signal is defined in interface parameters, the
system outputs the signal from the self-defined pin after delaying 3s, and then retains. During the
3-second delay, it is unavailable to press keys to operate the system.
4.4.9.4 Safety Door Detection Function
correctly; the system outputs the signal at the corresponding pin.
P511：SAGT： Safety door detection signal.
70
1) When SAGT signal is connected to 0V, the system confirms that the safety door is closed.
2) In Auto operation mode, if the system detects the safety door is open, the alarm “Safety door
not closed” occurs.
3) During automatic operation, if the system detects the safety door is open, all the axes feed is
stopped, and then the spindle is stopped, the coolant is turned off, with an alarm being issued.
Ⅰ
4) The safety door detection function is valid only in Auto operation mode.
OPERATION
4.4.9.5 Low-pressure Detection Function
When P412_d5 is set to 1, the low-pressure detection function is valid.
P412_d4 sets the low pressure alarm level; when P412_d4=1, the low-level alarm is set, when
P412_d4=0, the high-level alarm is set.
P332 sets duration for low pressure alarm.
1) After choosing the low pressure alarm detection function, the pressure detection icon △ is
displayed on the right of the status bar in Manual and Auto operation modes. When the
pressure is normal, the icon is displayed as a green solid triangle ▲. Once the system detects
the low-pressure alarm signal PRES is valid, the screen displays a half-empty yellow triangle if
the low pressure hold time is less than half of the time set in P332. If the low pressure hold time
exceeds half of the time set in P332, the screen displays a yellow full-empty triangle △. If the
signal hold time exceeds the value set in P332, the icon is displayed as a red empty triangle △,
with the alarm “Low pressure alarm” being issued ; in this case, all axes feed is suspended, the
spindle is stopped, and the automatic cycle cannot start.
4.4.10 Viewing Operation Information in Manual Mode
See Section 4.5.8 “Auto Operation Mode” in PartⅠOperation For details.
4.4.11 Appendix Table
4.4.11.1 List of M function Commands Controlled by MDI Input
◆ The M commands which can be input and executed in Manual mode are as follows:
71
Type Command Function Remarks

Spindle control M03, M04, M05 Spindle CW rotation, CCW rotation,
and stop Function interlock,
Coolant M08, M09 Coolant ON/OFF state retained
Chuck M10, M11, M12 Clamping, releasing, cancelling chuck
output signal
Lubricant M32, M33 Lubricant ON/OFF
Tailstock M78, M79, M80 Tailstock advancing, tailstock ' Function interlock,
retracting, tailstock cancelling output state retained
signal
Ⅰ
User output 1 M21, M22 Function interlock,

state retained
User output 2 M23, M24 Function interlock,
OPERATION
state retained
Spindle gear M41, M42, M43, M44 Switching spindle gear from gear 1, 2, Function interlock,
3, 4 state retained
User-defined M60 ~ M74
command
Output control and M82 E.g. M82 Q17.0 D3 or M82
detection Q17.0
Note: When inputting an M command, if its first digit is 0, the 0 can be omitted. The function of this M command is the
same as that in Auto operation mode. See the explanations for commands in Part Ⅱ Programming.
72
Chapter Four System Operation - Auto
4.5 Auto Operation Mode
In Auto operation mode, the descriptions for the input format of relative setting and
operation as well as the examples are as follows: The function keys to be pressed are indicated
with an icon; the letter keys, numeric keys to be pressed are indicated with an underscore; the
Ⅰ
system prompt messages are indicated with a rectangle.
OPERATION
In Auto operation mode, on the right corner of the screen is displayed the page key;
by pressing this key, the directory window displaying the operation keys in Auto mode pops up; by
pressing the key again, the pop-up window is closed; by directly pressing other function keys, the
window is automatically closed.
Press operation mode select key to enter Auto operation mode. In Auto operation mode, the
system completes the workpiece machining specified by the machining program; the system executes
the program from the first line in accordance with the logic path until the end of the program.
After entering the Auto page, the system performs necessary analysis and pre-check to the part
program in terms of the user parameter list and tool offsets. If the system detects the execution of the
program results in serious consequences after precheck, it will lock the CYCLE START key, and prompt
a window displaying an alarm message; in this case, it is unavailable to press CYCLE START key to
execute the program; the user should modify the program or relative parameters correctly in accordance
with the alarm message, and then perform the execution.
This system provides multiple modes for executing the workpiece program. Before the execution,
the user can perform necessary setting to ensure the safety during machining.
◆ The main functions of Auto operation mode include:

1) Setting Single/Continuous program execution
2) Setting Dry Run (without output) to check the execution, the program execution can be
accelerated in Dry Run state.
3) Prechecking the soft limit alarm before program execution
4) Setting the program block, starting the execution from any block between first block and last
block
5) Pressing keys to control the spindle and coolant
6) Performing Pause, Block Stop, End Stop, Cycle Stop during program execution
7) Adjusting Cutting Speed Override proportion
8) Modifying tool offsets during program execution
9) Displaying the states of the machine in real time, popping up the real-time alarm
◆ The explanations for the areas on the screen are shown in fig. 4-5:
Top: Displaying the execution mode (Single/Continuous, Dry Run), current program number, part
count, machining time, and key (prompting operation methods of system functions)
73
Upper left: Displaying the tool nose coordinates and machine coordinates, or tool nose path;
Lower left: Displaying machining blocks (the pointer points at the current block)
Right middle: Displaying the current states of the machine, including the spindle, coolant, lubricant,
tool post, chuck, tailstock, rotation speed and cutting speed;
Pop-up window: Displaying the alarm message of the program being executed.
Ⅰ
OPERATION
Fig. 4-5 Auto operation mode
4.5.1 System Working States in Auto Operation Mode
In Auto operation mode, the system may be in the following states from the perspective of program
machining; the functions which can be operated by the user vary with the system state; in this manual,
several simple concepts are introduced to describe these states.
Initial state: The execution has not been started, and the pointer points at the first block of the
program; When switched to Auto operation mode from other modes, the system is in
the initial state; after completing the execution, or after an alarm, the system returns to
the initial state.
Running state: The system is executing blocks, and the axes are moving.
Pause state: The execution is suspended when the axis move commands are being executed; the
system waits for user’s operation by pressing keys.
Block stop state: The execution stops after the current block has been executed and before the
next block is executed; the system waits for user’s operation by pressing keys.
4.5.2 Explanations for Function Key Operation in Auto Operation Mode
4.5.2.1 Switching between Single and Continuous Operation
Single/Continuous operation switch:
By pressing key, the system switches between Single/Continuous operation recurrently;

(valid in any state)
74
In the Continuous execution, the user can also press this key to switch to Single mode; then after
the current block is executed, the execution is stopped; by pressing CYCLE START key, the user can
continue the execution.
In Continuous mode, by pressing CYCLE START key once, the program is executed from the
beginning to the end once.
In Single mode, by pressing CYCLE START key once, one block is executed (for the cycle
Ⅰ
command, only one operation is executed; press CYCLE START key again to perform another
operation)
OPERATION
4.5.2.2 Switching bewteen Dry Run and Machining Run
Check all the contents of the machining program using Dry Run, preventing the workpiece form
being damaged due to a programming data error in the program.
Dry Run/Machining Run mode switch:
By pressing key, the system switches between Dry Run/Machining Run recurrently.
If the system is set to Dry Run when executing commands, whether M, S, T are valid is set by
parameters. After the system exits Dry Run state, the coordinate of each axis automatically recovers to
the one before Dry Run.
Parameters which are valid in Dry Run mode:
Parameter P401_d7：
0: When executing auxiliary functions, the system outputs and detects signals as usual.
1: When executing auxiliary functions, the system does not output and detect signals.
Parameter P401_d6:
0: The execution speed of the feed command is set by the program as usual.
1: The execution speed of the feed command is out of the control of the program. The system
demonstrates the program path at the max. speed of cutting feed (P113).
【Note】
1) The Dry Run key is valid only when the program executes the initial state. This key is invalid
during the program execution, or before the end of the execution, or before the execution state
is exited.
2) When P401_d7=0, all the M, S, T auxiliary function commands are executed in Dry Run state;
after the dry run state is exited, the system does not recover to the previous state.
3) When P401_d7=1, the system does not output and detect signals when executing auxiliary
functions; however, when executing T functions, the tool offset number is executed (e.g. if the
original one is T11, it becomes T13 after executing T33); after exiting Dry Run state, the original
state recovers.
4) In Dry Run state, all M60~M74 commands are executed normally; if the tool offset is modified,
the offset will be changed. If the tool offset is modified, the tool nose coordinates of the
corresponding offset number will be changed after exiting Dry Run state.
75
5) In Dry Run state, the part counter does not increase by 1 automatically.
4.5.2.3 Switching between Coordinate Display and Graph Display
This function is valid in all operation modes

The system enters AUTO operation mode after the first power-on, and it automatically selects the
coordinate display as the display mode.
In Auto operation mode, press T key to switch between Coordinate Display and Graph Display
Ⅰ
anytime.
In Graph Display mode, by pressing S key, the graph display path can be cleared.
OPERATION
4.5.2.4 Starting Execution from First Block of Program
After entering Auto operation mode, the system is in the initial state, and the pointer always points at
the first block of the current program. By pressing CYCLE START key, the user can start the program
automatic execution.
During the execution, the block being executed is displayed in poor color and blinks; the first line is
the block that has been executed, and the third line is the one to be executed; if the program being
executed is a conditional command, and the jump or call object is not known, the third line may not be
displayed.
4.5.2.5 Starting Execution from a Specified Block
In some special cases, if the user needs to start the execution from a block in the middle of the
program, first select the start block using this function.(Valid in the initial state)
Procedures of selecting a block:
1) By press INPUT key, the system displays the program browser window displaying the current
program, and the pointer points at the first line.
2) By pressing , , , or key, the system displays the last (next) block or

last (next) page of programs. By pressing ESC key, the system exits the selection and displays
the original program.
3) When the pointer points to the block to be selected, press ENTER key, then the window
prompts Run ?, and waits for the next operation.
4) At this time, if CYCLE START key is pressed, the system starts execution from the block which
the pointer points to; if ESC key is pressed, the system exits the selection, and the pointer
points at the first block.
【Note】
1) The specified block cannot be in the canned cycle, compound cycle or subprogram;
otherwise, unexpected accidents may occur. Generally, select G00 command, or the tool
change command before G00 to start execution.
76
2) It is suggested that the selected block from which the execution is started be the linear
movement or M, S, T commands. When selecting G02/G03/G05 command for execution,
make sure the coordinates of the tool and machine stay at the start point of the arc;
otherwise, the arc machined may not meet the requirements.
3) During the execution, by pressing ENTER key, the system also displays the browser
window, but it is forbidden to select a block.
Ⅰ
4.5.3 Display during Program Execution
OPERATION
During the program execution, on the screen are displayed the running states, dynamic running
coordinates, as well as the real-time tool nose running path, so as to monitor the running states of the
machine and program. The contents displayable are as follows:
Dynamic coordinates or dynamic tool nose movement path during the program execution.
Contents of the block being executed.
Auxiliary function states, e.g. spindle, coolant, lubricant, tool, rotation speed, chuck, tailstock.
Feedrate override, rapid traverse override.
Machining time.
Part count
4.5.3.1 Definition of Graph Display Data
Due to the limitation of the display area, for the workpieces of different sizes, different kinds of
scaling are required to display their complete shapes. Therefore, the system defines four types of data,
which are the workblank length, tool initial offset, display scaling, graph area type (customized or
system-created). When the system is in the initial state, the user can define the above data pressing
key. The display is as fig. 4-6:
[ AUTO ] Continuous %001 Part Count：1 Machining Time：00：00：00
Z length : 286 mm (workblank)

X length : 260 mm (workblank)
Z offset : 74 mm T 01 00
X offset : 0 mm
Scaling : 30 mm/grid
100%
Custom Program-created
100%
Z 0273.595
30mm/grid X:：0~300 Z:：74~494 X 0166.523 S01 S0500
G97 S0200 r
N0000 G00 Z300 X100 G98 F30

N0010 G01 W-50.000 U20.000 F100
F 00100
EDIT JOG AUTO PARA OFFT DIAG
Fig. 4-6 Definition of graph display data
In the graph display, the horizontal scale mark indicates the coordinate dimension in Z direction, the
vertical scale mark indicates the coordinate dimension in X direction; determine the area that is to
display the graph first. The custom graph display area is as follows:
77
Z: (Z offset ~ Z offset + display scaling ×14 );

X: (X offset ~ X offset + display scaling × 5× 2);
e.g. X：300 ← 600 Z：-200 ← 220
Hereinto:
1) The coordinates of the intersection point between Z scale mark and X scale mark are
Ⅰ
referred to as Z offset and X offset (unit: mm).

2) Both Z scale mark and X scale mark are divided into a fixed number of equal grids.
OPERATION
3) The length of each grid is referred to as the display scaling, which is the scaling of the
display graph. It has nothing to do with the actual machining scaling.
4) If the size of the workpiece is too large, select scaling down; if the size is too small, select
scaling up, in order to view the graph clearly; the actual value range of X/Z offset: -9999～
9999
After entering system graph display, the total lengths of Z scale mark and X scale mark of the part
program workblank are Z length and X length respectively. (Unit: mm)
Z: Scaling × Number of grids that the tool nose path graph occupies on Z axis;
X: Scaling × Number of grids that the tool nose path graph occupies on X axis × 2
The graph area is classified into the custom type and program-created type. When selecting the
custom type, the length, offset, scaling can be modified; when selecting the program-created type, the
length, offset, and scaling cannot be modified. Here, the area range values pre-set by the system is the
complete graph of the program movement path, so it is unnecessary to modify the length, offset and
scaling. The system enters the program to set the execution state.
4.5.3.2 Inputting Graph Display Data
The graph display data is shown as follows by pressing key in Auto operation mode. First
press key or key to select the custom type “Custom”, and then press key or
key to select the data to be modified. Then the screen displays the previously defined data as
follows. Move the cursor to the data to be modified, then press key to delete the original data
and input the desired data.
Z length ： 200 mm （workblank）

X length： 200 mm （workblank）
Z offset： -200 mm
X offset： -200 mm
Scaling： 50 mm/grid
Custom Program-created
Fig. 4-7 Graph data display

78
● Inputting data (without a decimal): Press key to delete the original data, then input the
new data. When pressing key repeatedly, the graph data display interface is displayed
recurrently.
Ⅰ
● Modifying the scaling: When the cursor points at Scaling, press key or key to
OPERATION
scale down or scale up. The built-in scaling in the system contains 16 levels: 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600. The user can select an appropriate level to obtain
the optimal display effect depending on the actual conditions.
● Two types of graph area: Press key or key to select custom type or
program-created type. When selecting the program-created type, the data cannot be modified;
when selecting the custom type, the data can be modified. At this moment, the user can input the
new data as required.
After completing the modification of the data, press ESC key or ENTER key to exit, and return the
system to Auto operation mode. If it is in the graph display mode, the system refreshes the graph
display range according to the set display data. When the set display data exceeds the displayable
range, the system prompts X/Z overlimit. At this moment, re-adjust the display data or reduce the
display scaling.
【Note】
1) To correctly display the tool path, the start position of the tool should be beyond the display
range of the workblank, or the machining progress cannot be correctly displayed.
2) During the program execution, if the coordinate display is switched to the graph display, the
system may not correctly display the workpiece shape until the next cycle starts.
4.5.3.3 Part Count and Timing
Part count: After the program executes the program end command M02, M20 or M30 once, the
part count increases by one. The max. count is 99999. If it is exceeded, it is
automatically cleared. When M99 command is used to end a program, the part count
also increases by 1 after the program is executed once.
Machining time: Total program execution time. When CYCLE START key is pressed to start
program execution, the system starts timing until the program ends. During the
execution, if a pause operation is performed, the timing is stopped simultaneously.
After the execution recovers, the timing is started again. In Single operation, the
system only records the execution time of each block. The max. execution time:
99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds; if the time reaches the maximum value, it is
automatically cleared.
79
Part count and machining time clearing: In the initial state, by pressing key twice,
the work count is automatically cleared; by pressing * key twice, the machining time is
cleared.
Ⅰ
4.5.4 Manual Operation for Machine Auxiliary Functions

OPERATION
In Auto operation mode, by pressing function keys, the user can operate some of the auxiliary
functions, which are the same as those in MANUAL operation mode. However, the auxiliary
functions allowed to operate by pressing keys vary with the system state; The rules are as follows:
1) In any state, the coolant ON/OFF switch key is valid.
2) When bit parameter P400_d5 is set to 0, the spindle CW, CCW, Stop keys are valid.
(invalid in the running state)_.
3) In the initial state, the spindle gear shift key (speed switch key) is valid.
4) In the initial state, when the hydraulic chuck control function is valid, the user can control
the clamping and releasing of the chuck with an external button or footswitch. The chuck
clamping/releasing action interlocks with the spindle.
5) In the initial state, when the hydraulic tailstock control function is valid, the user can control
the clamping and releasing of the tailstock with an external button or footswitch. The
tailstock clamping/releasing action interlocks with the spindle ..
4.5.5 Speed Override Adjustment in Auto Operation Mode
4.5.5.1 Speed Override Adjustment
In Auto operatio mode, the feedrate override key and rapid override key are valid in any state.
In Auto operation mode, the program execution speed can be changed by changing the speed
override, without altering the program and the speed set in parameters.
● Feedrate override adjusting the value set in speed word F in the program:
Actual feedrate = F × feedrate override
There are 16 gears from 0%～150% (increment: 10%) for the feedrate override, which controls all
the commands controlled by the feedrate during the program execution. When the feedrate override is 0,
the program execution is stopped.
● Rapid override adjusting the speed of rapid traverse commands such as G00 in the program.
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = P100 × rapid traverse override
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = P101 × rapid traverse override
The rapid traverse override contains four gears: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%. It controls all the rapid
traverse commands and operations during the program execution.
The feedrate override can be changed with the rapid traverse +/-, keys/feedrate +/-keys. During the
program execution, the actual speed of the slide carriage varies with the speed override.
80
The program execution is stopped when the feedrate override is 0 during the program execution,
and the system prompts “Feedrate override is 0” . By adjusting the feedrate override to a nonzero value,
the program execution is continued.
4.5.5.2 MPG Speed Control
In Auto operation mode, the user can also use a MPG to control the rapid traverse/feedrate override.
Ⅰ
When bit parameter P402_d1=1, the rapid traverse/feedrate override controlled by an MPG is valid. The
OPERATION
actual feedrate and rapid traverse rate are as follows:
Actual feedrate = F × feedrate override × MPG override
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = P100 × rapid traverse override × MPG override
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = P101 × rapid traverse override × MPG override
MPG override range: 0 ~ 100%.
Two types of MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override:

◆ Type 1:
When bit parameter P402_d0=0, the system enters MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override
by type 1; the system sets the current position (marked as point A) of the MPG as the position where the
MPG override is 0%. Within the 100 scales counted clockwise from point A , the MPG override increases
by 1 when the MPG is rotated one scale clockwise, and decreases by 1 when the MPG is rotated one
scale counterclockwise.
◆ Type 2:
When bit parameter P402_d0=1, the system enters MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override
by type 2; the MPG override is set to 0%, and the MPG override varies with the speed at which the MPG
is rotated clockwise. When the user rotates the MPG clockwise from slow to fast, the MPG override
changes between 0%~ 100%. To avoid impacts to the machine due to the uneven MPG speed, the
increment should not be less than 10% each time. If the MPG is stopped after CW rotation, the MPG
override becomes 0%; if the MPG is immediately rotated CCW after CW rotation (or is stopped after
CCW rotation), the MPG override keeps the CCW instantaneous override until it is rotated CW (or is
stopped after CW rotation).
The use of the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override is as follows:
In Auto operation mode, by pressing 【MPG】 key before executing the program or in the state of
program pause, single stop, cycle stop or feed hold (including the external feedrate/spindle hold), the
【MPG】key lights up, which indicates that the system is in the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate
override mode. At this moment, on the upper right corner are displayed the MPG control mode and
current MPG override with yellow ground. After completing the execution of the program, the system
automatically cancels the MPG-controlled rapid traverse/feedrate override mode.
【Note】
In thread machining commands (G32, G33, G92, G76), the feedrate speed is determined by the
spindle speed instead of value F. Thus the MPG override has no effect on these commands.
81
4.5.6 Interruption Operation during Program Execution
4.5.6.1 Interruption with Keys during Program Execution
The interruption operations below can be performed during the program execution:
Emergency stop: The execution is stopped immediately, which cannot be continued.
Pause The execution can be continued by pressing CYCLE START key.
Ⅰ
Single stop: The execution is stopped after the current block is executed, which can be continued
by pressing CYCLE START key.
OPERATION
Cycle stop: The execution is suspended after the current cycle is finished, which can be continued
by pressing CYCLE START key.
◆ Pause
1) By pressing CYCLE PAUSE key, the execution is stopped during program execution. After the
system responds, all the move axes are stopped, with PAUSE displayed on the lower left
corner of the screen.
2) In the pause state, by pressing CYCLE START key, the system recovers the program and then
continues executing the remaining blocks; by pressing ESC key, the system exits the program
and then returns to the initial state automatically, with the pointer pointing at the first block of
the current program.
【Caution】
1) After pause, the spindle and tailstock are controllable. Before pressing CYCLE START key to
perform execution, make sure whether the spindle is started and whether the chuck and
tailstock are ready. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the machine or results in personal
injury.
2) In executing G32, G33, G92, G76 command, this key is invalid when the system is in the block
where the spindle machining thread is tracked.
◆ Single stop
1) During Continuous program execution, by pressing SINGLE key, the system switches to single
execution mode. After the current block is executed, the screen displays Single stop.
2) After Single stop, the program execution is continued if CYCLE START key is pressed; and the
system returns to the initial state with the pointer pointing at the first block of the current program
if ESC key is pressed.
【Note】
1) In executing the canned cycle commands, the Single Stop is valid after each step in the cycle is
completed.
◆ Cycle end stop
1) During Continuous program execution, the screen displays Cycle stop: ON by pressing hp6
key. The execution is stopped after M20 is executed, and the screen displays Cycle stop
82
4.5.6.2 External feed/Spindle hold Knob
The External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective only in Auto operation mode.
Parameter P412_d6 sets whether the External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective.
When P412_d6=1, the system External feed/Spindle hold knob is effective; the input signals are led
in through pin MXZ1, MXZ2.
When P412_d6=0, the External feed/Spindle hold knob is ineffective; the input signal pins are used
Ⅰ
for other purposes.
OPERATION
◆ Introduction to External feed/Spindle hold knob
This CNC system contains an interface for the External feed/Spindle hold knob. When the knob is
rotated to different positions, the movement of the spindle and slide carriage can be enabled or disabled.
When debugging the program, it is very convenient to control the movement and stop of the spindle and
carriage. The External feed/Spindle hold knob has three positions, whose functions are as follows:
Note: For the sign indicating the

the External feed/Spindle
hold knob, refer to the
user manual provided by
Feed hold knob the machine tool builder.
Position 1 enables the spindle rotation and the slide carriage movement.
Position 2 enables the spindle rotation, and disables the slide carriage movement.
Position 3 disables the spindle rotation, and enables the slide carriage movement.
◆ Use of External feed/Spindle hold knob
Before executing the program:
When the External feed/Spindle hold knob is at position 1 and position 2, the spindle start/stop can
be controlled by pressing keys manually; however, when it is at position 3, the spindle cannot be started.
In Single operation mode:
When the External feed/Spindle hold knob is located at position 1, all the commands are executed
as usual; when it is at position 2, the spindle control commands can be executed rather than the move
commands of X, Z axes. These move commands can be executed only when the knob is rotated back to
position 1. When it is at position 3, no block can be executed. To execute the blocks, rotate the knob
back to position 2 or position 1.
In Continuous execution mode:
After starting the program, the user can rotate the External feed/Spindle hold knob anytime to
control the spindle and the movement of the slide carriage.
When the knob is located at position 1, the program is executed normally.
When the knob is rotated to position 2 from position 1, the slide carriage enters the pause state and
stops moving, but the spindle state is maintained.
When the knob is rotated to position 3 from position 2, the spindle stops rotating.
83
When the knob is rotated to position 2 from position 3, the spindle recovers to the original state.
When the knob is rotated to position 1 from position 2, the carriage recovers to the movement state.
During the feed hold and spindle stop, if ESC key or RESET key is pressed, the system returns to
the automatic initial state. Then the previous spindle state and the slide carriage unfinished commands
cannot be maintained. The user can continue the machining only by restarting the program.
4.5.6.3 External Start and Pause Signals

Ⅰ
The external cycle start/pause signal, which is set by parameter P412_d7, is effective only in AUTO
OPERATION
operation mode.
When P412_d7=1, the system external cycle start/pause signal is effective; the input signals are led
in through pin ST, SP.
When P412_d7=0, the system external cycle start/pause signal is ineffective; the input signal pins
are used for other purposes.
The function of the external pause operation key signal (SP) is the same as that of the feed hold key
(cycle pause key) on the panel; and the external cycle start key signal (ST) is the same as that of the
cycle start key on the panel. Both SP and ST are output to the system from the machine, with the low
level valid.
Before the system is switched to Auto operation mode from other modes, it is required that the
“external start button” and “external pause button” be released (disconnected). Otherwise, the system
issues an abnormality alarm.
For the connection, refer to Chapter Three CNC Device Connection in Part Ⅲ Connection.
4.5.6.4 Feeding Device Alarm Function
If the function is required, define its input pin in interface parameters, and perform the connection
correctly; the system detects the signal at the corresponding pin.
P512： Dalm： Detection signal of feeding device alarm.
【Function descriptions】
1) When executing M20 command, the system automatically stops and issues an alarm after
detecting the signal.
2) If the program does not end with M20 command, but with M02 or M30 command, the feeding
device alarm function is invalid.
4.5.7 Modifying Tool Offset during Program Execution
In the machining, it is available to modify the tool offsets in a pop-up window. However, this
operation should be performed with caution.
4.5.7.1 Methods of Modifying Tool Offsets during Program Execution
◆ Methods of modifying tool offsets
84
1) In the automatic operation, by pressing OFFSET key, the system displays a window, showing
the tool offset modification page; by pressing OFFSET key again, the system closes the window,
and so on.
2) Select the tool offset number to be modified by pressing , or ,
key; then select the tool offset item to be modified by pressing or key (See
Ⅰ
Section 4.7 “Tool Offset Operation Mode” in PartⅠOperation for details).
OPERATION
3) Press ENTER key, then input the data; if the input data is required to directly replace the
original data, press ENTER key; if it is necessary to add the input data to the original data,
press ALTER key; if it is required to cancel the data, press ESC key.
4) After the input, press OFFSET key or ESC key to exit the tool offset display page.
【Note】
1) In inputting the data, the user can switch back to display page of Auto operation mode anytime.
Then after switching to the tool offset display page again, the previously-input data which has
been confirmed by pressing ENTER key is retained, and the user can continue the data input.
2) On the tool offset modification page, the operations in Auto operation mode, such as dwell and
feedrate override modification, are still valid. During dwell, the user can also switch to the tool
offset modification page to modify the tool offsets.
4.5.7.2 Modifying Validity of Tool Offsets during Program Execution
【Warning】
The tool offset data modified is valid only after the tool change is executed. If it is the tool offset data
corresponding to the current tool offset number that is modified, the modified data is valid after the next
tool change is executed. If it is the tool offset corresponding to the tool offset number which has not been
executed that is modified, the modified data is valid in this execution.
If the tool offset of the current tool offset number is modified in the program without a tool change
command, the modified tool offset becomes valid after executing M02, M30, M20, “Reset” or interruption.
4.5.8 Viewing Running Information in AUTO Operation Mode
This function is valid in any state in Auto and Manual operation modes.
In the process of machining a part program automatically, a window can be displayed for the user to
view three kinds of data, i.e. macro variable, I/O variable and others during the system operation. The
explanations are as follows:
Macro variable: Viewing and modifying all the common variables; (unsupported)
I/O variable: Viewing the values (i.e. system interface states) of the system interface variables;
(unsupported)
85
Others: Viewing the blocks that have been executed, spindle fluctuation range in threading, nesting
call level in subprogram and program cycle.
◆Operation methods are as follows:
1) In Auto operation mode, press key to cause the system to display a window indicating a
three-item (macro variable, I/O variable, others) page; by pressing ESC key, the system closes
Ⅰ
the window.
OPERATION
2) Press or key to select the item to be viewed. The item selected is displayed in
black.
3) When there are many macro variables to be viewed, press key to select a variable
(pointed by the pointer). Here, the macro variable cannot be modified. Then press or
key to view the last or the next macro variable, or press or key to view
the last page or next page of macro variables (seven lines per page); press key to return,
then the macro variable is displayed in black.
4) In automatic initial state, the common variable at which the pointer points can be modified by
pressing ENTER key.
5) After viewing the variables, press ESC key to exit the display page.
【Explanations】
1) Macro variable: Displaying the common variables being executed in the program where they are
edited, including the variable sequence number, variable name, variable value and state.
Therein, the variable values varying with the program execution are dynamically displayed, and
the sequence number as well as the variable name are arranged in ascending order. Variables
r001～r040 are displayed in brown, variables r041～r99 are in orange, and variables r100～r199
are in green.
2） I/O variable: Dynamically displaying the interface state of the current program. The two state
values of the input interface variable are: 0 (low level) or 1 (high level); The low level indicates
that the external signal is valid, and the pin is connected to 0 V; the high level indicates that the
external signal is invalid. Variable state of the input interface: When “0” is output, the external
can form a return circuit. When “1” is output, the external cannot form a return circuit. r1001～
r1032 are the states of the input interfaces, and r2001～r2032 are the states of the output
interfaces; These states are classified into 8 groups. The first line displays the first group: r1008,
r1007, r1006, r1005, r1004, r1003, r1002, r1001, and so on.
3) Others: Viewing the total number of blocks that have been executed, spindle fluctuation range in
threading, nesting call level of the subprogram and program cycle.
86
4) Before starting the program, the macro variables r100 ～ r199 can be modified manually.
Modification method: Select the macro variable to be modified, press ENTER key to input the
desired value, and then press ENTER key again to complete the modification.
4.5.9 Return to Program Reference Point in AUTO Operation Mode
Ⅰ
This function is valid in the initial state in Auto operation mode.
This system allows the program to be started wherever the slide carriage is after the user sets the
OPERATION
workpiece coordinate system and program reference point. In this case, both the operations of program
zero point return by pressing keys and program reference point return by G commands return to the
position of the set program reference point.
After returning to the program reference point using a G command, if it is required to continue the
machining, use G00 command to simultaneously position the absolute coordinates of the two axes, in
order to ensure the machining is correct.
After returning to the program zero point by pressing keys manually, the system automatically points
to the first block of the program. Here, by pressing CYCEL START key, the system starts execution from
the first block of the program.
4.5.10 System Reset Key and Emergency Stop Signal Processing in Auto Mode
In Auto operation mode, the system enters the Reset state by pressing Reset key. See Section
4.1.4.7 “Reset Operation” in PartⅠOperation.
For details about the emergency stop signal in Auto operation, see Section 4.1.4.3 “Emergency Stop
Alarm” in PartⅠOperation.
【Note】
1) Before releasing the emergency stop alarm, first confirm the fault has been removed;
2) Pressing down the emergency stop button before Power On and Power Off can reduce
the surging to the equipment.
3) Re-perform machine zero return after releasing the emergency stop alarm, to ensure the
coordinate position is correct (if the machine is not equipped with the machine zero, it is
forbidden to perform machine zero return);
4) The external emergency stop is valid only when bit parameter P404_d7 is set to 0.
4.5.11 Adjusting Brightness of LCD screen in AUTO, MANUAL Operation Mode
This function is valid in the initial state in AUTO operation mode.
◆ The operation method is as follows:

1) Press 9 key twice rapidly to cause the system to display the brightness adjusting window; the
windows is closed by pressing any key other than the brightness adjusting key.
87
2) The brightness adjusting window contains 0～10 levels: level 0 is the darkest, and level 10 is the
brightest; Press brightness adjusting key to increase the LCD brightness, press
brightness adjusting key to reduce the LCD brightness.

Ⅰ
【Note】
1) When the LCD has LED backlight, the brightness adjusting function is valid for the LCD screen;
OPERATION
when the LCD has CCFL backlight, the function is invalid for the screen.
2) The brightness adjusting window will disappear in 10 seconds if no key operation is performed.
3) It is also available to adjust the LCD screen brightness in Manual operation mode in the same
way as in Auto operation mode.
4.5.12 Displaying Executing States of M Commands in Auto, Manual Operation Mode
The displayed M commands are classified into the following 6 groups: M21/22, M23/24, M61/62,
M63/64, M65/66, other M commands: M60, M67～M74, M81/82/83. In Manual/Auto operation mode, if
the M codes above are executed, the screen displays corresponding prompts. The M commands being
executed are displayed in red; the M commands which have been executed are in green; the M
commands which are terminated during operation are in yellow.
4.5.13 Additional Operation in Auto Operation Mode
When executing the program in Auto operation mode, if there is an interlock relationship between
spindle and chuck, execute M3 to start the spindle during M11; there are two choices after an alarm
occurs:
1) Press ESC key to exit to the initial state in Auto operation mode.
2) Pedal the footswitch to execute M10; or execute M3 to start the spindle by pressing CYCLE
START key; or exit to the initial state in Auto operation mode by pressing ESC key.
88
Chapter Four System Operation - Parameter
4.6 Parameter Operation Mode
The functions of Parameter operation mode include: parameter input, parameter extraction,
parameter solidification and parameter transfer; for each operation, the system provides corresponding
intelligent prompt messages. Also, the user can press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the
system to view the list of the system parameter operation keys.
Ⅰ
The descriptions for the input formats and examples of related setting and operation in the
OPERATION
manual are as follows: the function keys to be pressed are indicated by a sign; the letter keys, numeric
keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are indicated by a
rectangle.
In inputting a letter or a numeric, if a wrong one is input, press key to delete it, and then
input the correct one.
before confirmation, it means the current operation is quit.
Special note: Before modifying the parameters, save all the parameter setting values stored in
the system into a PC or laptop. Once the parameters are modified by mistake or system faults
occur, the user can recover the system using the stored data.
By the easy to search and remember principle, the parameters are classified into the following types:
reference coordinate parameters, motion parameters, drive parameters, auxiliary function parameters,
bit-control parameters, interface parameters, variable initial value parameters and pitch error
compensation parameters. Each parameter has a definite meaning, which determines the operation
mode of the CNC system and machine. When installing and debugging the machine, it is necessary to
modify some parameters depending on the actual conditions.
Press operation mode select key to enter Parameter operation mode page. (If the system
displays a window requiring passwords, input the user password or directly press Enter key to enter
the Parameter interface).
[ PARAMETER ] hp2
M-REFER PARAM P000 Z program reference point 303.698

X-MOTION PARAM P001 X program refere nce point 203.698
Z -DRIVE PARAM P002 Y program reference point 0.000
S-AUXLIARY PARA P003 Z axis 2nd prog refer point 200.000
T-BIT PARAM P004 Z axis 2nd prog refer point 200.000
U-INTRFACE P005 Y axis 2nd prog refer point 200.000
P006 Z axis 3rd prog refer point 200.000
W-VARIBLE
P007 X axis 2nd prog refer point 200.000
F-PITCH PARAM
EDIT JOG AUTO PARAM OFFT DNG
Fig. 4-8 Parameter operation mode

89
4.6.1 Parameter Overview
The operation characteristics of the parameters include:

1) According to the level of the password that the user input, the parameters corresponding to this
level can be modified.
2) If ENTER key is pressed without inputting any password, the operation level is level 4. The user
can enter the parameter interface to view the parameters here rather than modify them.
Ⅰ
3) The input and display format of the parameter: a decimal should include a decimal point, and a
negative number should include a negative sign; for the convenient and safe operation, the
OPERATION
system limits the number of effective digits.

4) The user can open the message window which prompts the input range of the parameter data.
5) The system self-checks the parameter data at power on, and prompts automatic initialization
after detecting the data is in mess.
6) The system provides abundant and applicable safety parameters. Therefore, the user can
reduce the misoperation by setting the parameters appropriately, so as to prevent accidents.
4.6.1.1 Parameter Authority
The parameter authority is the password level to modify parameters. For convenient management,
the system provides the parameter authority setting function. The current operation level is displayed on
the prompt column on the top of the parameter page.
Arranged from high to low, the parameter password levels are as follows:
Level 1: **** Machine tool builder, range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=1;
Level 2: **** Device administrator, range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=2
Level 3: 3333 Machine tool operator, range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=3
Level 4: **** No password input, range of alterable parameters: Parameter level >=4
For the parameter levels of each type of parameter, see the parameter lists in the appendix.
4.6.1.2 Entering an Operation Level
The procedures of entering different operation levels are as follows:

① Enter parameter password input page;
② Input the operation password (each time a number is input, a sign “*” is displayed.)
③ After the input, press ENTER key to enter the operation level corresponding to this password.
4.6.1.3 Parameter Management
The parameter management consists of the parameter display, parameter authority, and parameter
initialization, solidification, extraction, sending and receiving according to the parameter authority.
【Parameter display】
Meanings of the parameter colors:
In the current authority, the parameters allowed to modify are displayed in yellow, the parameters
not allowed to modify are displayed in white;
90
On the parameter page, some operation function options are also relative to the authority; e.g. the
function options which are not operable after pressing hp6 key are displayed in grey-white.
Prompt message display:
When inputting a parameter, the user can open or close the prompt message about the parameter
value range by setting parameter P415_d7.
Other displays:
Ⅰ
If the user tries to modify the parameters with a higher authority than the current one, the system
displays the alarm message Without modification authority! on the parameter setting area.
OPERATION
On the parameter page, if a parameter is modified successfully, a sign “*” is marked in front of its
parameter number, indicating the parameter modification succeeds.
After completing the some operations of hp6, the system displays the operation result, and marks a
sign “*” ahead of the parameter number which is successfully modified, indicating the parameter
modification succeeds.
【Parameter authority】
In different authorities, the alterable parameters are displayed in yellow, and the unalterable
parameters are displayed in white. The parameter update (e.g. parameter update through a serial port or
USB) can only modify the parameter data of the current user authority or lower.
The sign “ ” before a parameter means the parameter is alterable under the current password
level; “ ” means the parameter is unalterable.

Authority modification
The authority is modified using passwords, i.e. inputting the password when entering the parameter
password input page. If the password input page does not appear when entering the parameter page,
the user can set whether to memorize the password by setting bit parameter P416_d7. When
P416_d7=0, the password is not memorized. In this case, after entering the parameter page from other
operation modes, the parameter password input page will appear. The operations are as follows:
1) Set bit parameter P416_d7 to 0;
2) Press any operation mode key other than PARAMETER operation key;
3) Press PARAMETER key to enter the parameter password input page;
4) Input the operation authority password directly;
5) After the input, press ENTER key to enter the operation level corresponding to the password.
【Parameter saving】
The successfully-modified parameter is automatically saved into the CNC system. In addition, when
exiting from the parameter page (i.e. pressing other operation mode keys to enter other operation mode
pages), the system saves all the parameters. The parameter data saved in the system are read each
time the system is powered on. If the system detects a parameter exceeds the range during parameter
reading, the system replaces the value by the one within the range and issues a prompt. If the
parameters read during Power On are in chaos, the system prompts whether to read the original
solidified parameters; if there is no solidified parameter, the system prompts the user to select
91
Step/Servo parameters to initialize the parameters, and save them to the system. The main difference
between step parameters and servo parameters is the motion parameter value.
4.6.2 Modifying Parameters
The system parameters have been initialized in factory. After installing the system to the machine,
Ⅰ
please modify and debug the parameters appropriately depending on the actual conditions.
After a parameter number is selected, it is highlighted by the system.
OPERATION
4.6.2.1 Searching Parameters
The parameter search is to search the desired parameter; there are two methods:
Method 1:
◆ On the parameter page, select: M - reference parameters, X - motion parameters, Z - drive
parameters, S - auxiliary parameters, T - bit parameters, U - interface parameters, W - variable
initial values or F – pitch error compensation parameters, as required.
E.g. select M – reference parameters, then press M key to enter the reference parameter page.
◆ Press , key or , key to move the highlighted block cursor to the
parameter number to be searched; for bit parameters, press or key to move

the cursor leftwards or rightwards to select different bits, with the meaning of the selected bit
displayed at the same time.
Method 2:
Locate the desired parameter number directly. The procedures are as follows:
Press P key, and input the parameter number to be searched, then press ENTER key. The system
then displays the desired parameter with a highlighted block cursor. E.g., to search P208, first input P,
and input 2 0 8, then press ENTER key to seek parameter P208.
4.6.2.2 Modifying Parameters
The procedures of modifying parameters are as follows:

① Seek the parameter to be modified using the method above.
② Press ENTER key, then input the parameter data; or directly input the parameter data.
③ If wrong data are input, press key to delete them, then input the right ones.
④ Press ENTER key.
【Note】
1) If the data input exceeds the specified parameter range, the data is invalid, and the contents of
the parameter are not changed.
2) After inputting the data, the input data is invalid if ESC key is pressed.
3) The procedures of inputting bit parameters are as follows:
92
① After selecting the parameter to be modified, select the parameter bit to be modified using left
and right keys (the explanation for the currently selected bit is displayed on the bottom of the
screen).
② Modifying a single bit: Directly input the desired data (only “0”or “1”).
③ Modifying all bits: the method is almost the same as that of manual setting of common
parameters. The only difference is that the data is input from left to right. E.g. input 11, and press
Ⅰ
ENTER key, then the parameter is modified to: 00000011; input 11000000, and press ENTER
key, then the parameter is modified to 11000000.
OPERATION
④ Bit parameter P411_d6: if it is changed, the pitch error compensation parameters P1000～P1899
are initialized to 0, i.e. all the values of previous pitch error compensation parameters are
changed to 0.
4.6.3 Parameter hp6 Function
Press hp6 key on the parameter page to display the following:
Key U – USB interface operation

Key R – RS232 interface operation
Key I –Parameter extraction
Key K – Parameter solidification
Key F – Software update
Key D –Memory update
According to the password level, the user can communicate, extract and solidify the parameters as
well as update the system software and memory; “I” is for parameter extraction; “K” for parameter fixture;
“F” for software update (the system software is upgraded with USB or RS232); “D” for internal memory
update.
During data solidification and extraction, please do not turn off the power, and do not perform other
operations before the operation is completed. The data solidification and extraction have no effect on the
part programs stored in the system.
4.6.3.1 Parameter Communication and Standard Format
There are two types of communication depending on the parameter transmission direction:
Parameter sending and parameter receiving. The parameter receiving includes three modes: PC→CNC,
USB→CNC, CNC→CNC; the parameter sending also includes three modes: CNC→PC, CNC→USB,
CNC→CNC.
Parameter sending: (Operation level: all levels)
The operators of all levels can send the parameters to a U disc or a PC through RS232 serial port.
Parameter receiving: (Operation level: Machine tool builder, device administrator, machine operator)
The operators of level 3 or above can receive the parameters from a U disc or PC (RS232).
However, it is only valid for those parameters which can be modified in the corresponding level.
93
For the operation of the communication software that uses RS232 for transmission, see Chapter
Five RS232 and USB System Communication in PartⅠOperation. GSKCOM_C001.EXE can realize the
file transmission between PC and CNC, which is easy to operate and has high communication efficiency
and reliability.
RS232 and USB interface function: for transmitting parameter data.
Press R key to transmit data by means of RS232 communication mode.
Ⅰ
Ⅰ. RS232 parameter receiving: PC→CNC, CNC→CNC

OPERATION
1. Set the baudrate and communication port of the communication software; see Chapter Five
RS232 and USB System Communication in PartⅠOperation.
2. Input the parameters saved in the external computer to the CNC system; or transmit the
parameters between CNC systems.
1) Connect the communication cable between CNC system and computer, or between CNC
systems at Power Off.
2) Turn on the CNC system and select the Parameter setting operation mode. Set a
corresponding authority in the CNC, and the received parameters can only modify the
parameters with a corresponding authority level; Before inputting a password, the CNC
disables the parameter receiving; note: The transmission between CNC systems only
transfers the parameters with the same password level.
3) First press hp6 key, then press R key
4) Press 1 key to receive parameters.
5) The operation is completed, and the system prompts the receiving succeeds
Ⅱ. RS232 Parameter sending: CNC→PC, CNC→CNC

1. RS232 baudrate setting
Before transmitting files, set the baudrates of bit parameter P414_d7 and P414_d6. The
communication baudrate is subject to the setting of the sender. Setting range: 9600, 19200, 38400
(unit：bps)
2. Input the parameters stored in the external computer to the CNC system; or transmit parameters
between CNC systems.
1) Connect the communication cable between CNC system and computer, or between CNC
systems at Power Off.
2) Turn on the system and enter the parameter page.
3) First press hp6 key; then press R key.
4) Press 2 key to send the parameters.
5) The operation is completed, and the system prompts the sending succeeds.
Ⅲ USB operation: USB→CNC, CNC→USB

First press hp6 key, then U key to transmit data using USB communication mode. The user should
select the transmission direction as required.
94
When using a U disc to transmit parameters, create a folder with file name “C001PAR” in its root
directory, and the receiving and sending of parameters are in this folder. Format of file name: “PAR” + file
number (three digits) + “.TXT”
Ⅳ Standard format of TXT parameter file on PC

On a PC, the parameter files can be edited with TXT or LST text. However, to send the files correctly
Ⅰ
to the system, the file name and the contents of the file must be in accordance with the requirements of
the system. The requirements are as follows according to the parameter file pattern output by the
OPERATION
system.
1) On a PC, the suffix of the file name should be TXT or LST, e.g. PAR099.TXT; it is suggested
that the user use TXT suffix, for the convenience of the operation on PC.
2) The first line of the contents of the TXT file must be the parameter mark: “CNC_GSKC001”; this
is an essential part.
3) The second line is the comment part, in front of which should be placed “//”; this item is omissible.
4) The third line and the following lines are the contents of the parameter. The contents must be in
accordance with the requirements of the standard format.
E.g. P000: 00000.000 // Z program reference point
Hereinto, P000 is the parameter number; the format of the parameter number includes three
parts: “P + number + :”. If any part of them is missing, the parameter number is incorrect.
00000.000 is the contents of the parameter; “//” is placed in front of the parameter comment.
5) The contents of the file can be part of all the parameters.
6) The pitch error compensation parameters include equal-interval pitch compensation
parameters and unequal-interval pitch compensation parameters. Select the appropriate format
for pitch error compensation parameters according to the parameter types to be updated. The
selection of formats of the pitch error compensation parameter is relative to bit parameter
P411_d6: When P411_d6=0, the pitch error compensation has equal interval, when P411_d6
=1, the space of the pitch error compensation has unequal interval. If the selected pitch error
compensation parameter does not match corresponding bit parameter P411_d6, the pitch error
compensation parameters cannot be updated successfully. The format is as follows:
◆Format of equal–interval pitch error compensation parameter
// Pitch error compensation parameter; starts with P1000 in TXT file
P1000： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
P1010： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
P1020： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
……
P1880： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
P1890： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
P1900： 0 // Machine coordinate of Z axis start point
P1901： 0 // Machine coordinate of X axis start point
P1902： 0 // Machine coordinate of Y axis start point
P1903： 0 // Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis
P1904： 0 // Pitch error compensation interval of X axis
P1905： 0 // Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis
95
◆Format of unequal-interval pitch compensation Parameter:

// Pitch error compensation parameter; starts with P2000 in TXT file
P2000： 00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0
P2010： 00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0
……
P2880： 00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0
P2890： 00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0，00000.000，0
P2900： 00000.000 // Machine coordinate of Z axis start point
Ⅰ
P2901： 00000.000 // Machine coordinate of X axis start point

P2902： 00000.000 // Machine coordinate of Y axis start point
OPERATION
P2903： 00000.000 // Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis

P2904： 00000.000 // Pitch error compensation interval of X axis
P2905： 00000.000 // Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis
7) Standard format of parameter file communication on PC:
TXT file format Remarks
CNC_GSKC001 Mark for checking parameters, which cannot be

//reference coordinate; omitted.
P000： 00200.000 // Z program reference point
…… The contents behind // is the comment, which can be
P027： 0 // Y zero offset omitted.
//motion parameters;
P100： 6000 // Z max. rapid traverse rate PXXX parameter number, P000: the first parameter
…… number cannot be omitted.
P209： 1200 // Spindle encoder lines
PXXX: the parameter numbers after the first number
//Auxiliary function； can be omitted, each of which is regarded as the
P300： 1000 // M41 gear max. speed parameter following the last one.
……
P344： 0 0: the parameter contents can be omitted.
//bit-control parameter;
P400： 00000000 // Running setting PXXX: the parameter number and colon : must not be
…… separated.
//interface parameter；
P512： 0 // Feed device alarm detection Dalm
…… ……：indicates other parameters, which are not listed.
//variable initial value； The parameters can be partly received.
P600： 0 // variable r01
……
//Pitch error compensation parameter；
P1000： 0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0，0
……
……
P1905： 0 //Y pitch compensation interval
4.6.3.2 Parameter Extraction and Solidification
The parameters which can be viewed on the interface are saved in the SRAM memory of the
system. The memory has the power failure protection function; if the battery of the mainboard fails , the
parameters will be lost.
The system is provided with the parameter initialization function; please perform the initialization
operation depending on the matched motor drive unit; for the system matched with a DA98 series drive
unit, perform the servo initialization, and for the system matched with a DY3 series drive unit, perform
the step initialization. The difference between servo and step initialization parameters lies primarily in the
96
X- motion parameter. For the difference between servo/step values, see the motion parameter list in the
appendix.
The initialization parameters are not applicable to all the machines. The machine tool builder should
modify the parameters, such as the spindle and tool post, according to the specific machine
configuration.
To prevent the parameters from being lost, the user should perform the solidification command. That
Ⅰ
is, to solidify the parameters that have been modified to the FLASH memory of the system as a backup.
The FLASH memory is capable of storing the data permanently without any battery. If the current
OPERATION
parameters are lost, recover them by extracting the solidified parameters.
The user can perform the parameter extraction and solidification according to the prompts displayed
in a pop-up dialog box. The parameter extraction commands include the step parameter initialization,
servo parameter initialization and machine tool parameter extraction.
【Explanations】
1) Before performing the parameter solidification, the system checks corresponding parameters. If
the check is not passed, the system prompts an alarm message requiring the user to modify the
corresponding parameters; if the check is passed. the user can save the parameters to the
FLASH of the system for solidification.
2) If no parameters are solidified before, the user cannot perform solidified parameter extraction.
4.6.3.3 System Software Upgrade and Internal Memory Update
The system software upgrade is to upgrade the system software, i.e. to replace the old version of
software by the new version; so as to improve the system functions.
The system update is to update and improve the system software, so as to make the system more
stable. It does no harm to the system, but incorrect operation may result in the system update failure. If
the update fails, the system cannot be started up, or even the system hardware will be damaged.
Therefore, we suggest the user not upgrade the system software without authorization. It is
recommended that the upgrade service be provided by our professional staff with our after-sale service
center.
The system memory upgrade is to upgrade the system memory, including the memory occupied by
the system software.
If the memory upgrade fails, serious consequences may occur. It is suggested that the
operation be performed by our professional technician instead of the user.
The methods of upgrading the system and memory include: USB mode and RS232 mode; the
operation can be performed only with the authority of the machine tool builder.
1) System software upgrade using USB mode:
After inserting a U disc, operate the system based on the system prompts; then the system
automatically completes the software upgrade. When using USB mode for upgrade, create a
folder with the name “C001DATA” in the root directory of the U disc. The sending and receiving of
codes are in the folder. Format of the file name: “DATA” + file number (three digits) + “.TXT”.
Range of the file number: 0~254.
97
2) System software upgrade using RS232 mode:

The system can be upgraded by using the communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE. For
the operation of the communication software with RS232 mode, see PartⅠOperation: Chapter
Five “RS232 and USB System Communication” .
When upgrading the memory with USB mode, create a folder with the name “C001MEMO” in the
root directory of the U disc. The receiving and sending of codes are in the folder. Format of the file name:
Ⅰ
“MEMO”+ file number（three digits）+“.TXT”. Range of the file number: 0~254. When upgrading the
memory with RS232 mode, complete the operation using the communication software
OPERATION
GSKCOM_C001.EXE.
【Note】
1) After the upgrade using USB mode succeeds, if ESC key or RESET key is pressed, the user
needs to return the control to Edit operation mode to re-edit the current program, or the system
issues an alarm.
4.6.3.4 Function Command Authority
On the parameter page, some operation function options are also relative to the authority; it is not
allowed to operate those function options displayed in grey white.
Correspondence between function options and password authorities
Operation authority Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Machine Device Machine No
Operation option tool builder administrator tool password
operator
Step, servo parameter ★
initialization
Extracting parameters of ★ ★ ★
machine tool builder
Parameter solidification ★ ★ ★
operation
Parameters received with USB According to According to According to According to
and RS232 parameter parameter parameter parameter
level level level level
Parameters sent with USB and All All All All
RS232
System software update and ★
memory update
The “★” in the table indicates the required authority; the space indicates no authority is required.
4.6.4 Description of Parameters
The system parameters are classified based on their use and functions. Their functions are as
follows: (Y axis function is invalid)
4.6.4.1 Parameters of Reference Point, Soft Limit __ P000～P020
The reference coordinate parameters include the important coordinate position points of machine
Z/X/Y axes. The movement of each axis is based on these points.
98
【Program reference point of Z/X/Y axis】__ Reference coordinate parameters P000, P001, P002
This parameter is used for setting the position of the program reference point. In Manual/Auto
operation mode, the machine returns to this position after performing the program reference point return.
The setting of the position can be modified by inputting a command (in Manual operation mode) or
executing G50 command (in Auto operation mode) .
The coordinates of the program reference point are the machine coordinates, which are not affected
Ⅰ
by the tool offset.
OPERATION
【Second, third program reference point of Z/X/Y axis】__ Reference coordinate parameters P003,
P004, P005, P006, P007, P008
The second and third program reference points resemble the program reference point: in Auto
operation mode, after specifying G30 command, the machine returns to the second or third program
reference point specified by G30 command. For details, see Section 4.11 “G30-Return to 2nd, 3rd
Program Reference Point” in Part Ⅱ Programming.
【Positive, negative tool nose software limit of Z/X/Y axis】__Reference coordinate parameters
P009, P010, P011, P012, P013, P014
This parameter is used to limit the motion range of the tool nose coordinates. It determines the max.
strokes of the tool post on the positive and negative direction of Z/X/Y axis.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, if the tool nose coordinates of Z/X/Y axis are greater than or equal
to the positive soft limit values of the tool nose, the tool cannot be moved in the positive direction any
more. It can only be moved in the negative direction. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm: Positive
tool nose software limit alarm. This also applies to negative movement.
【Positive, negative machine software limit of Z/X/Y axis】__ Reference coordinate parameters
P015, P016, P017, P018, P019, P020
This parameter is used for limiting the motion range of the machine coordinates. It determines the
max. strokes of the machine in the positive and negative direction of Z/X/Y axis.
In Manual/Auto operation mode, if the machine coordinates of Z/X/Y axis are greater than or equal
to the positive soft limit values of the machine, the tool cannot be moved in the positive direction any
more. It can only be moved in the negative direction. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm: Machine
positive soft limit alarm. This also applies to negative movement.
4.6.4.2 Parameters of Zero Return Function__ P021～P026, P109～P111, P406～
P407
【Machine zero coordinates of Z/X/Y axis】__Reference coordinate parameters P021, P022, P023
This parameter determines the coordinates of the machine zero point position. If the machine is
equipped with the device to detect the machine zero point, and P407_d1 is set to 0, after the “Machine
Zero Return” (or G28) is executed in Manual/Auto operation mode and the system detects the “Zero
99
Signal”, the system automatically modifies the current machine coordinates to the values set in
P021/P022/P023.
【Zero offset value of Z/X/Y】__ Reference coordinate parameters P024, P025, P026
When using a servo motor, in general, the zero return detection is to detect the deceleration signal
and the zero point rotation signal of the motor encoder; When the deceleration signal installed on the
Ⅰ
axis coincides with the zero point rotation signal, the zero return precision may be affected (the
difference my be one revolution); in this case, set the offset to 2mm to avoid 2mm, then perform the
OPERATION
detection.
【Zero-return low speed of Z/X/Y axis】__ Motion parameters P109, P110, P111
Zero-return low speed is the traverse speed of the axis when detecting the zero signal during the
execution of machine zero function. When the zero return speed is higher than the minimum start speed,
the zero return is performed at the minimum start speed. When the zero-return speed is lower than the
start speed, the zero return is performed at the zero-return speed. After setting the zero-return speed, do
not modify it freely. Otherwise, the zero-return precision may be affected.
【Zero setting 1】__ Bit parameter P406 (password level: 1)
d7 d6 d 5 d4 d3 d2 reserved d0
d7__ With/without Z deceleration signal

d6__ With/without X deceleration signal
d5__ With/without Y deceleration signal
0: Without. // If the machine is not equipped with a deceleration switch or stopper, set it to 0;
1: With. // If the machine is equipped with a deceleration switch and stopper, set it to 1;
d4__ With/without Z zero point signal
d3__ With/without X zero point signal
d2__ With/without Y zero point signal
0: Without. // If the machine is not equipped with a machine zero switch or stopper, set it to 0;
1: With. // If the machine is equipped with a machine zero switch and stopper, set it to 1;
// The system provides four types of zero return (see CONNECTION for details) as follows:
Zero return Deceleration Zero
Remarks
type signal signal
1 Return to machine zero using both the deceleration
With With
signal and zero return signal
2 Return to machine zero only using the deceleration
With Without
signal
3 Without With Return to machine zero only using the zero signal.
4 Return to the zero coordinates set by parameters
Without Without
(without a machine zero)
100
d0__ Without machine zero, the zero-return key is:

0: Disabled. // When the system has no machine zero, the “Machine zero return key” on the panel is
disabled, but G28 zero return in the program is still enabled.
1: Enabled. // When the system has no machine zero, the “Machine zero return key” on the panel is
enabled, and the system returns to the machine zero by means of type-4 zero return.
// When neither the machine zero switch and stopper, nor the deceleration switch and stopper are
Ⅰ
equipped, the system returns to the machine zero by type-4 zero return, i.e. returning to the zero
coordinates set by parameters when there is no machine zero.
OPERATION
【Zero setting 2】__ Bit parameter P407 (password level: 1)
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 Reserved
d7__ Zero return direction of Z axis

d6__ Zero return direction of X axis
d5__ Zero return direction of Y axis
0: Positive. // If the deceleration switch is installed at the end of the positive direction for the
coordinate axis, the parameter is set to 0, and the system moves towards the
positive direction to detect the zero point;
1: Negative. // If the deceleration switch is installed at the end of the negative direction for the
coordinate axis, the parameter is set to 1, and the system moves towards the
negative direction to detect the zero point;
d4__ Deceleration signal level of Z axis
d3__ Deceleration signal level of X axis
d2__ Deceleration signal level of Y axis
0: Low. // The system decelerates to stop during axis zero return when detecting the
deceleration signal is the low level.
1: High. // The system decelerates to stop during axis zero return when detecting the
deceleration signal is the high level.
d1__ Whether to modify machine coordinates after the machine zero is returned.
0： Modify machine coordinates // In general, set it to 0. The machine coordinates are
modified after zero return.
1: Not modify machine coordinates // Set it to 1 when debugging zero return function, then the
zero return precision can be known visually.
4.6.4.3 Parameters of Movement Speed and Acceleration Time __P100 ～P108,
P112～P119
To enhance machining efficiency, the system can be applied to motors of different types or machine
tools of different loads by adjusting parameters P100～P116, etc. E.g. When using a stepper motor,
adjust the parameters to a lower value to prevent stepout; when using a servo motor, adjust the
parameters to a higher value appropriately.
101
For details, refer to Section 4.6.5 Appendix in PartⅠOperation. The stepper initial values differ from
the servo initial values in the motion parameter list
【Max. traverse speed limit of Z/X/Y】__Motion parameters P100, P101, P102
Parameters P100, P101, P102 determine the rapid traverse rate for X, Y, Z axis respectively in
manual rapid traverse and G00 command. Meanwhile, the actual rapid traverse rate of Z, X, Y axis is
also controlled by the rapid override.
Ⅰ
Actual rapid traverse rate of Z axis = P100 × rapid override (unit: mm/min)
Actual rapid traverse rate of X axis = P101 × rapid override (unit: mm/min)
OPERATION
Actual rapid traverse rate of Y axis = P102 × rapid override (unit: mm/min)
【Minimum initial speed of Z/X/Y】__Motion parameters P103, P104, P105
Parameters P103, P104, P105 determine the minimum initial speed for Z, X, Y axis respectively
when the axis movement is performed in MANUAL operation mode or G00 is performed in AUTO
operation mode; When the speed of Z, X, Y axis is lower than the value set in P103, P104, P105, the
value set in P103, P104, P105 takes precedence.
Adjust the value of this parameter to a proper value based on the actual loading of the machine tool.
(Unit: mm/min)
【Z/X/Y rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time（ms）】__Motion parameters P106, P107, P108
Parameters P106, P107, P108 determine the time that the speed linearly increases from 0 to
15m/min for, X, Y, Z axis respectively when the axis movement is performed in MANUAL operation mode
or G00 is performed in AUTO operation mode; (X axis is programmed in radius ). The greater the values
of P106, P107, P108, the longer the acceleration process of Z, X, Y axis. To improve machining
efficiency, decrease the values of P106, P107, P108 as much as possible on the condition that the load
characteristics are satisfied. (Unit: ms)
【Initial speed of cutting feed】__Motion parameterP112
P112 cutting initial speed. Parameter P112 determines the initial speed of cutting commands such
as G01, G02, G03, G05 during system automatic machining. (Unit: mm/min)
【Max. speed limit of cutting feed】__Motion parameter P113
P113 maximum speed of cutting feed. P113 determines the maximum speed of cutting commands
such as G01, G02, G03, G05 during system automatic machining. When the F speed value specified by
the program is greater than the one set in P113, the latter takes precedence. When the thread cutting
speed exceeds P113, the system issues an alarm, terminating the thread machining. (Unit: mm/min)
【Cutting feed linear/exponential acceleration/deceleration time (ms)】__Motion parameters P114,
P115
P114 Feed linear acceleration/deceleration time; P115 Feed exponential acceleration/deceleration
time;
Parameters P114 and P115 determine the time that the speed of cutting commands such as G01,
G02, G03, G05 accelerates from 0 to 15m/min during system automatic machining. (Unit: ms)
【Thread cutting acceleration/deceleration time (ms)】__Motion parameter P116
102
Parameter P116 determines the time that the speed of the thread cutting axis accelerates from 0 to
15m/min. The smaller the P116, the shorter the generated distance. If P116 is too small, the stepper
motor may step out. (Unit: ms)
【Thread run-out acceleration/deceleration (ms)】__Motion parameter P117
When there is run-out in thread cutting, parameter P117 determines the acceleration/deceleration
time is the time that the speed accelerates from 0 to 15m/min. The smaller the P117, the steeper the
Ⅰ
run-out. If P117 is too small, the stepper motor may step out. (Unit: ms)
【G99 initial lines】__Motion parameter P118
OPERATION
If the parameter is set to 0, the system detects the lines of the spindle encoder each time it executes
G99 command. It starts to execute the commands following G99 when the encoder rotates to the lines
set in P118, i.e. the spindle rotates to a specific angle.
If the setting value of the parameter is not 0, the system does not detect the lines of the encoder, but
directly executes the commands following G99.
The lines that the system detects is four times that of the spindle encoder.
E.g. If the lines of the encoder installed is 1200, the lines that the system detects changes between
0~4800 recurrently. This parameter should be set between 0～4800 as well, or the system keeps waiting
because G99 command cannot be detected.
【Delay time when positioning converts to cutting (ms)】__Motion parameter P119
If the last command is a rapid positioning command, and its following one is a cutting command, the
delay set in P119 is automatically inserted between these two commands;
This parameter is used for preventing the taper streak on the workpiece due to the excessively fast
command transition. If the parameter is too large, the machining efficiency may be affected. In general,
set it between 0～100.
Example 1:
G00 U-50 ；Rapid positioning
G01 W-10 F100 ；The following command (this one ) is a cutting command. Before executing this
command, delay P119 is inserted; to prevent taper streak generating on the front end.
Example 2：
G00 U-50 ；Rapid positioning
S1000
G01 W-10 F100 ；Since this command does not follow the rapid positioning command closely (another
command separates them ), no delay is inserted during execution.
4.6.4.4 Parameters of Drive and Compensation P200～P209, P411, P1000～P1905
【Command pulse multiplier of Z/X/Y】__Drive parameters P203, P205, P207
103
【Command pulse division coefficient of Z/X/Y】__Drive parameters P204, P206, P208

P203 — Z multiplier coefficient：Numerator of Z axis electronic gear.（Range: 1～99999）
P204 — Z division coefficient：Denominator of Z axis electronic gear.（Range: 1～99999）
P205 —X multiplier coefficient: Numerator of X axis electronic gear.（Range: 1～99999）
P206 — X division coefficient: Denominator of X axis electronic gear.（Range: 1～99999）
P207 — Y multiplier coefficient: Nominator of Y axis electronic gear. (Range: 1～99999)
P208 —Y division coefficient: Denominator of Y axis electronic gear. (Range: 1～99999)
Ⅰ
【Note】
OPERATION
1) When setting parameters of drive, the ratio of the multiplier coefficient to the division coefficient
should be limited between 1/128 ～128, or the system issues an alarm.
2) When the ratio of multiplier coefficient to division coefficient is 1:1:
Z/Y axis: The system outputs one pulse each time 0.001mm is moved;
X axis: In system radius programming, each time 0.001mm is moved, two pulses are output.
(In system diameter programming, each time 0.001 mm is moved, one pulse is output.)
3) When the ratio of the multiplier coefficient to division coefficient is not 1:1:
Z/Y axis: Each time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse that the system outputs is: multiplier
coefficient/division coefficient
X axis: In system radius programming, each time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse output is:
multiplier coefficient * 2/divisioin coefficient. (In system diameter programming, each
time 0.001 mm is moved, the pulse output is: multiplier coefficient/division coefficient. )
4) The maximum pulse output frequency of the system is 511pps/ms. This value cannot be exceeded
anytime, or an alarm occurs during movement. I.e. System parameter P100 (maximum traverse
speed) × multiplier coefficient/division coefficient should not be greater than 30000mm/min.
【Spindle encoder lines】__Drive parameter P209
This parameter determines lines with settable range between 100～5000 for the spindle encoder.
When the spindle is ON and the diagnosis operation mode is entered, if the set value is inconsistent with
the lines of the spindle encoder, the diagnosis check prompt : Encoder lines inconsistent with parameter
is displayed in the diagnosis mode. Unit: line/rev.
【Backlash value for Z/X/Y】__ Drive parameters P200, P201, P202
These parameters respectively determine the backlash values of mechanical drive for Z, X, Y axes.
Unit: mm.
Because gaps exist in the driving parts such as a screw and speed reducer on the machine tool,
errors occur when the tool post moves back and forth. To compensate the errors caused by the gaps,
Parameters P200, P201, P202 are provided. By setting these three parameters, the system
automatically compensates the gap errors when the machine changes its direction during movement.
The mechanical drive gap of the machine can be measured with following method (an example for Z
axis)
1) Select MANUAL operation mode and proper feedrate.
2) Mount the dial-indicator to a proper position on the machine, move the tool post till it touches
the measuring head, and then set the pointer of the dial-indicator to 0.
104
3) Select manual STEP operation mode, with a step width of 1.0mm.

4) Press Z axis coordinate axis move key to move the tool post towards the dial-indicator, then
make the pointer of the dial-indicator rotate one revolution and point at 0.
5) Press Z axis coordinate axis move key to move in the reverse direction, the dial-indicator rotates
back because the pointer cannot return to 0 position due to the gap. Here, the difference
between the position where the pointer points and 0 position is the backlash value of Z axis.
Ⅰ
【Note】
1) It is necessary to repeat the above steps several times to measure the gap correctly.
OPERATION
2) The measuring method for X axis is the same, but the measured value should be multiplied by 2
to convert to the diameter amount.
3) The backlash compensation speed of Z, X, Y axis is set in P411_d1.
Note: For GSK928TD, pitch error compensation function and tool nose radius compensation function
are not provided.
【Precision compensation】__Bit parameter P411（password level: 2）
d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved Reserved d1 Reserved

d7__Ptich error compensation function
0: Disabled. // The pitch error compensation function is disabled.
1: Enabled. // The pitch error compensation function is enabled.
d6__ Representation of pitch error compensation value
0: Unequal space. // also referred to as corner description method. 150 groups of corner
information can be input for each axis.
1: Equal space. // By using equal-space description method, 300 compensation points can be
input for each axis; the interval between points is the same.
Since the compensation data formats for corner description method and equal-space description method
are different, the system prompts whether to confirm the modification when modifying this bit parameter.
If the modification is confirmed, the original compensation data will be cleared, and the user needs to
re-input the data in terms of the new format.
d5__ Tool nose radius compensation function
0: Disabled. // Tool radius compensation commands G41, G42 are disabled.
1: Enabled. // Tool radius compensation commands G41, G42 are enabled.
d4__ Tool radius compensation mode
0: Line transition. // The system processes the transition mode for the sharp corner as the line
transition in executing tool nose radius compensation.
1: Arc transition // The system processes the transition mode for sharp corner as the arc
transition in executing tool nose radius compensation.
d1__Backlash compensation mode
0: Low speed. // Z/X/Y axis performs backlash compensation at the low speed, which is set by
P103, P104, P105.
1: High speed. // Z/X/Y axis performs backlash compensation at the high speed, which is set by
P100, P101, P102.
105
【F—Pitch error compensation parameter】__Pitch error compensation parameters P1000～

P1905
The pitch error compensation parameters can be divided into unequal-space representation and
equal-space representation, based on the setting of bit parameter P411_d6.
4.6.4.5 Parameters of Spindle and Coolant __ P300～P317, P326, P329, P341, P410
Ⅰ
【Spindle configuration】__Bit parameter P410（password level：1）

OPERATION
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 Reserved Reserved
d7__ Spindle control output

0: Level. // The spindle (M03/M04/M05) and coolant (M08/M09) are controlled by system
level output.
1: Pulse. // The spindle (M03/M04/M05) and coolant (M08/M09) are controlled by system
pulse output. P326 is the pulse width.
d6__ Spindle S control
0: Gear shift. // The spindle is the gear-shift spindle, using S commands to shift gears; M41~M44
are forbidden.
1: Frequency conversion. // The spindle is the frequency-conversion spindle, the speed of
which is commanded by S, with gears M41～M44.
//For details, refer to Section 4.4.3.2 Spindle S Command -- Gear Shift Control and Section 4.4.3.3
Spindle S command – Speed Control in PartⅠOperation
d5__S Gear shift output
0: Direct. // The control signals for the spindle gear are direct outputs S01～S04. It is forbidden to
use S05～S15 commands.
1: Coded. // The control signals of the spindle gear are coded outputs S00～S15.
// This parameter is used together with P310 (Occupied lines of the spindle gear control ). If it is set
to direct output, each control line controls one gear, and the total number of gears is the same as
that in P310; If it is set to coded output, it performs coded output based on the number of control
lines in use. The total number of control gears is 2P310 ; up to 4-channel control line output can be
set as gear control signal.
d4__ Switching between spindle and Y axis
0: Not performed. // The spindle cannot operate in position control mode. It is forbidden to use
M47/M48 command.
1: Performed. // 928TD does not support this function.
d3__ Spindle brake signal output
0: Used. // When executing M5, the brake signal MSP is output.
1: Not used. // When executing M5, the brake signal MSP is not output. The MSP signal interface
can be used for other interface controls.
106
d2__ Spindle CCW signal output

0: Used. // To output spindle CCW signal M04
1: Not used. // Not to output spindle CCW signal M04
【Maximum speed of gear M41, M42, M43, M44】__ Auxiliary parameter P300, P301, P302, P303
This parameter is the maximum speed of gear M41, M42, M43, M44. When the system employs a
Ⅰ
frequency converter to control the spindle, and the spindle gear is in gear M41, M42, M43 or M44, it is
the maximum speed corresponding to the machine when the system outputs 10V analog voltage. When
OPERATION
the spindle is controlled by a spindle multi-gear switch value, parameters P300, P301, P302 and P303
are disabled. (Unit: r/min)
【Spindle minimum speed in constant surface speed】__ Auxiliary parameter P304
This parameter limits the minimum speed in the constant surface speed cutting. According to the
computational formula for the constant surface speed cutting:
Surface speed = Spindle speed * |X| *π/1000 (Unit for X: mm, unit for spindle speed: r/min)
The X in the above formula means the absolute value (diameter value) of the X-axis tool nose
coordinate. When X is smaller than a certain value, the spindle speed calculated is smaller than the
value set in P304. In such a case, the spindle speed is clamped to the speed set in P304.
【Spindle maximum speed in constant surface speed】__ Auxiliary parameter P305
This parameter limits the maximum speed in the constant surface speed cutting. According to the
computation formula for the constant surface speed cutting:
Surface speed = Spindle speed * |X| *π/1000 (Unit for X: mm, unit for spindle speed: r/min)
The X in the above formula means the absolute value (diameter value) of the X-axis tool nose
coordinate. When X is greater than a certain value, the spindle speed calculated is greater than the
value set in P304. In such a case, the spindle speed is clamped to the speed set in P305.
【Thread smooth speed boundary】__Auxiliary parameter P306
During thread machining, the system has two modes: One is the high-speed machining, the other is
the low-speed machining. Parameter P306 is the boundary between the two machining speeds (unit:
r/min ). In general, P306 should be greater than 100.
If P306 is set to 300, make a judgment on the mode to be used based on the currently-detected
actual spindle speed before the system machines the thread. If the actual speed is greater than 300, use
the high-speed machining mode. Otherwise, use the low-speed machining mode.
When using the high-speed machining mode, the system following performance for the spindle
speed fluctuation is the highest, but the motor running stability may be reduced; When the spindle speed
fluctuation is intensive, there may be vibrating streak generated on the machining surface, or step-out
occurs on the stepper motor.
When using the low-speed machining mode, the system following performance for the spindle
speed fluctuation is slightly lower, but the motor running stability may be enhanced; When the spindle
speed fluctuation is intensive, the vibrating streak is not obvious and the stepper motor is not easy to be
out of step.
107
【Thread spindle fluctuation alarm】__Auxiliary parameter P307

During thread cutting, if the spindle speed fluctuation exceeds the value set in P307, the system
issues an alarm after the current thread block machining is completed, and suspends the workpiece
machining; by pressing CYCLE START key, the user can proceeds to the next step of the machining
program.
This parameter is valid for G33, G92, G32 command. (Unit: r/min)
Ⅰ
【Spindle JOG time（ms）】__ Auxiliary parameter P308

In spindle JOG mode, it is the time for starting the spindle, then the spindle stops automatically after
OPERATION
the time is up. When parameter P308 is 0, the spindle JOG function is disabled. (Unit: ms)
【Speed in spindle JOG】__ Auxiliary parameter P309
When the spindle is in the JOG state in MANUAL mode, it is the speed after spindle start key is
pressed. (Unit: r/min)
If P309=0, the JOG output speed is the same as the speed at which M03/M04 is executed.
【Occupied lines of spindle gear control】__Auxiliary parameter P310
The parameter limits the number of output control lines used for spindle gear control. Up to 4 control
lines can be used. When the control lines are less than 4, only the low-digit control lines can be used,
and the unused high-digit control lines can be used for other purposes.
When the occupied number of lines =0, no output is available.
When the occupied number of lines =1, only S01 output is available.
When the occupied number of lines =2, only S02 and S01 outputs are available.
When the occupied number of lines =3, only S03, S02 and S01 outputs are available.
When the occupied number of lines =4, S04, S03, S02, S01 outputs are available.
【Frequency-conversion spindle gear shift time 1, 2（ms）
】__ Auxiliary parameters P311, P312；
The spindle gear shift time for M41~M44 when the spindle is the frequency-conversion spindle.
(Unit: ms). For details, refer to Section 4.4 Manual Operation Mode in PartⅠOperation.
【Interval time for spindle gear shift（(ms)】__ Auxiliary parameter P313
This parameter determines the time interval from cancelling the original gear signal to outputting the
new gear signal. (Unit: ms)
【Output voltage during spindle gear shift (mV)】__ Auxiliary parameter P314
It is the output voltage during spindle gear shift. (Unit: mV)
【Delay time from spindle stop to spindle brake (ms)】__ Auxiliary parameter P315
This parameter determines the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to sending the
spindle brake signal. (Unit: ms)
【Spindle brake output time (ms)】__Auxiliary parameter P316
This parameter means the brake signal output time. In general, it is set to the time required for the
spindle motor to stop completely from the braking. (Unit: ms)
【Spindle maximum speed limit】__Auxiliary parameter P317
This parameter limits the spindle maximum speed. (Unit: r/min)
108
If the S speed set by the program command is greater than the value given by P317, the spindle
speed is clamped to the one set in P317.
【Spindle control pulse time (ms)】__Auxiliary parameter P326
This parameter determines the hold time of the pulse signal when the spindle (M03/M04/M05),
coolant (M08/M09) output is the pulse control mode. (Unit: ms)
【M code response detection time（ms）】__ Auxiliary parameter P329
Ⅰ
This parameter determines the limit for M code response detection time. If the M code response
signal is not detected within this period of time, the system prompts the corresponding alarm message.
OPERATION
(Unit: ms). E.g. When executing M10 in MANUAL operation mode, if the chuck clamping response signal
is not detected after waiting for the period of time set in P329, the system issues: Chuck clamping
response detection overtime alarm.
【Cutting enabled when rotation speed reaches certain percentage】__Auxiliary parameter P341
If the cutting is started immediately after the spindle is started or the gear is shifted, the tool life and
workpiece will be affected because the spindle has not reached the preset speed.
This parameter is used for the automatic identification of the spindle speed arrival. E.g. P341=80
means the cutting is allowed when the spindle actual speed is within the speed range (100%±20%) set
by the program, i.e. within the range between 80%～120% ; If the programming is S2000, the cutting is
allowed when the actual speed detected by the system is within the range of 1600～2400. Otherwise,
the system has to wait.
When P341=0, this function is disabled. When P341 is not set to 0, the system automatically detects
the actual speed in MANUAL or Auto mode, with the state of the spindle actual speed being displayed on
the screen; if the spindle speed Sxxxx is displayed in yellow, it means the preset range has not been
reached; if it is displayed in green, it means the preset range has been reached.
Use: When using either a frequency-conversion spindle or gear-shift spindle, this parameter is valid.
When using the frequency-conversion spindle, the system makes a judgment by using the
programmed speed S and actual speed.
When using the gear-shift spindle, the spindle speeds of gears S1～S4 respectively correspond to
the set values of parameters P300～P303; e.g. when the gear of the gear-shift spindle is S1, the system
makes a judgment by using parameter P300 and the actual speed. P341 is invalid for other gears, so
they are not restricted by P341 during cutting.
This parameter is valid only for the cutting commands, e.g. G01, G02, G33; and it is also valid for
the cutting in compound commands．When cutting commands are executed continuously, only the first
cutting command is detected. If the spindle speed is displayed in yellow, and the cutting command does
not move, it means the system is waiting for the spindle to reach the preset speed.
4.6.4.6 Parameters of Tool Post __ P318～P325, P408
【Tool post setting】__Bit parameter P408（password level：2）
109
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 Reserved Reserved
d7__ Tool number signal detection mode
0: Default // The tool number detection method is preset inside the system.
1: Table checking // For some special tool posts, it is necessary to use the table checking
method, which requires to set the tool number detection signals in
parameters P541～P556 . For details, refer to Section 3.4.4 in Part Ⅲ
Ⅰ
Connection.
d6__ Tool post clamping in-position signal
OPERATION
0: Without. // Without the tool post clamping in-position signal (input interface 9 can be released).
1: With. // With the tool post clamping in-position signal (input interface 9 is occupied).
d5__ Tool post clamping signal level
0: Low // Tool post clamping signal low level is valid.
1: High // Tool post clamping signal high level is valid.
d4__ Tool post overheat detection level (this parameter is invalid)
0: Low // Tool post temperature control switch (TGR signal) low level is valid.
1: High // Tool post temperature control switch (TGR signal) high level is valid
d3__ Strobe signal level
0: Low // Tool post encode strobe signal low level is valid.
1: High // Tool post encoder strobe signal high level is valid.
d2__Pre-indexing in-position detection level
0: Low // Tool post pre-indexing switch low level is valid.
1: High // Tool post pre-indexing switch high level is valid.
【Tool post type】__ Auxiliary parameter P318（maximum value: 9）
This parameter is determined by the tool post type installed on the machine. The system performs
the tool change mode according to this parameter.
P318=0，the machine installs the line-up tool post, which does not occupy any input/output interface
of the system.
P318=1or 2, the machine installs the common electric rotation tool post; performs tool change mode
1 or mode 2.
P318=3, it is applicable for the 8-station tool posts of Taiwan Genyang machine tool
CLT-63~CLT300 series; performs tool change mode 3
P318=4, it is applicable to the tool post type which can change the tool nearby in the
forward/reverse direction; performs tool change mode 4.
P318=9, use M60 to self-define a command to change the tool. See the example in Section 3.4
“Tool Change Control Function and Connection” in Part Ⅲ Connection.
If P318 is not the numbers described above, the system performs tool change in terms of tool
change mode 1.
【Maximum tool number 】__Auxiliary parameter P319
This parameter determines the maximum tool number on the electric tool post of the machine. The
110
standard configuration of the system is 8-station electric tool post. The tool number signal can be
extended to 12~16 stations electric tool post according to the specific coded input. See Section 3.4 “Tool
Change Control Function and Connection” in Part Ⅲ Connection
【Number of lines occupied by tool number signal】__ Auxiliary parameter P320
This parameter determines the number of system hardware interfaces occupied by the tool number
signal. The maximum number is 8, i.e., up to 8 interfaces can be occupied. In general, it is set in
Ⅰ
combination with the maximum tool number. The interface occupation can be displayed in the Diagnosis
operation mode.
OPERATION
【Tool change time T1 T2 T3（ms）】__ Auxiliary parameter P321, P322, P323
T1__ Delay time from “stopping CW rotation” to “starting tool post CCW rotation” after tool post CW
rotation detects the tool number signal during tool change. (Unit: ms)
T2_ During the tool pose CCW rotation, if it is necessary to detect the tool post clamp in-position
signal TCP, P323 is the delay time from “after the tool number clamp signal is detected” to “when the tool
post CCW signal stops” .
T3_Reserved. (Unit: ms)
【Tool post CCW rotation clamping time（ms）
】__Auxiliary parameter P324
During tool change of the electric tool post, this parameter determines the duration of the tool post
CCW signal if it is not necessary to detect the tool post clamping in-position signal TCP; and the tool post
maximum CCW clamping time if it is necessary to detect TCP. (Unit: ms)
Note: The value set in P324 should be adjusted properly depending on the actual electric tool
post. An excessively large value may cause overheat or even damage to the motor. An
excessively small value may not clamp the tool post firmly. Therefore, the user should use
different values for debugging and then choose a proper one during debugging.
【Tool change rotation time limit（ms）】__Auxiliary parameter P325
Maximum duration from “when the tool post CW rotation starts” to “when tool number signal of the
target tool is detected”. (Unit: ms)
The below parameters are the dedicated interface parameters for tool change mode 3. Refer to Section
3.4.3.4 Tool Change Mode 3 in Part Ⅲ Connection.
【Tool post brake output：TZD】__Interface parameter P507
This parameter controls the brake device of the tool post motor.
【Tool post pre-indexing output：TFD】__Interface parameter P508

This parameter controls the pre-indexing proximity switch.
【Pre-indexing in-position detection: TFDC】__Interface parameter P528

This parameter detects the in-position signal of the pre-indexing proximity switch.
【Tool number strobe signal: TXT】__Interface parameter P529

This parameter is the strobe signal for tool post encoder. It controls the tool number output together
with the binary absolute value of the encoder. Up to 12 positions can be controlled.
111
【Tool post overheat detection: TGR】__Interface parameter P530（this parameter is invalid）

This parameter detects the temperature control signal of the tool post. When the temperature is
higher than 120℃, the temperature control switch is turned off.
4.6.4.7 Parameters of Chuck and Tailstock __ P327～P328, P409
【Chuck control pulse time（ms）】__Auxiliary parameter P327

Ⅰ
If the chuck is in the pulse control mode, this parameter determines the duration of the pulse signal
output by executing the chuck command (M10/M11). (Unit: ms)
OPERATION
【Tailstock control pulse time（ms）】__Auxiliary parameterP328

If the tailstock is in the pulse control mode, this parameter determines the duration of the pulse
signal output by executing tailstock command (M78/M79). (Unit: ms)
【Chuck tailstock】__Bit parameter P409（password level: 1）
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
d7__ Chuck control function

0: Enabled. // The system has the hydraulic chuck control function.
1: Disabled. // The chuck control function is disabled. It is forbidden to use M10/M11command.
d6__ Chuck clamping mode
0: Outer chuck. // The hydraulic chuck is the outer chuck mode.
1: Inner chuck. // The hydraulic chuck is the inner mode. For the execution of M10/ M11 command,
refer to Section 4.4 “Manual Operation Mode” in PartⅠOperation.
d5__Chuck response detection
0: No performed.
1: Performed. // If the response detection is required, input interfaces RM10 and RM11 are
respectively used as clamping and release in-position signal inputs
d4__Tailstock control function
0: Enabled. // The system has the hydraulic tailstock control function.
1: Disabled. // The system disables the M78/M79 command, so it has no hydraulic tailstock
control function.
d3__Chuck control output
0: Level. // Level mode control M10, M11 signal output
1: Pulse. // In pulse control mode, the output holding time of signals M10, M11 is set by parameter
P327.
d2__Tailstock control output
0: Level. // Level mode control M78, M79 signal output.
1: Pulse. // Pulse control mode, the output holding time of signals M78, M79 is set by parameter
P328.
d1__Hydraulic chuck foot switch input
0: Required. // In addition to controlling the hydraulic chuck using a command, it is also
available to control the hydraulic chuck by an external foot switch.
112
1: Not required.
d0__Hydraulic tailstock foot switch input

0: Required. // In addition to controlling the hydraulic tailstock using a command, it is also
available to control the hydraulic tailstock by an external foot switch.
1: Not required.
Ⅰ
4.6.4.8 Bit Parameters of Running and Efficiency__ P400～P401
OPERATION
【Running setting】__Bit parameter P400 （password level：3）
Reserved d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 Reserved
d6__Spindle gear memory

0: Disabled. // Spindle gears M41～M44 are not memorized in MANUAL or AUTO state. The
gear is M41 after the power is turned off and then back on.
1: Enabled. // Spindle gears M41～M44 are memorized in MANUAL or AUTO state. The gear
after power on is the one before the last power-off.
d5__ Spindle in AUTO mode
0: Is controlled by keys. // In the state that no program is executed in AUTO mode, Spindle CW,
Spindle CCW, Spindle Stop keys are enabled.
1：Is not controlled by keys. // In AUTO operation mode, Spindle CW, Spindle CCW, Spindle
Stop keys are disabled.
d4__MPG 0.1mm step width
0：Enabled. // In MANUAL operation mode, it is allowed to select a large override (×0.1mm gear)
to rotate the MPG.
1: Disabled. // In MANUAL operation mode, it is not allowed to select a large override (×0.1mm
gear) to rotate the MPG.
d3__Rapid positioning mode
0: Independent traverse. // G00 performs rapid positioning respectively by the rapid traverse
mode for each axis.
1: Interpolation traverse. // G00 performs rapid positioning simultaneously by the scaling mode.
d2__ Arc across vertex process mode
0: Precise. // Precisely processing the backlash in the arc across the vertex.
1: Smooth. // Smoothly processing the backlash in arc across the vertex.
d1__ MPG axis select
0: Selecting axis with keyboard. // The axis select key on the keyboard is enabled.
1: External axis select. // The external MPG control knob is enabled, and the axis select key on
the keyboard is disabled.
// In MANUAL operation mode, after pressing MPG key to switch to MPG mode, the indicator lights
up, and on the screen are displayed the states of the external MPG control knob, axis select key and
movement amount knob. The coordinate axis selected is highlighted.
113
【Efficiency setting】__Bit parameter P401（password level：3）

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
d7__ TMS command in dry run

0: Executed. // In the dry run state, when executing the auxiliary function command, the signals are
output and detected as normal machining.
1: Skipped. // In the dry run state, when executing the auxiliary function command, the signals are
Ⅰ
not output and detected.

OPERATION
d6__Feed command in dry run

0: Normal speed. // In the dry run state, the executed speed of the feed command is set by the
program, just as normal machining.
1: Acceleration. // In the dry run state, the executed speed of the feed command is out of the
control of the program. The system demonstrates the program path at the
maximum speed (P113) for the cutting feed.
d5__Short linear high speed
0: High speed connection. // Short linear connection transition uses the high-speed connection.
1: Not used. //Short linear connection transition does not use the high-speed connection.
// When P401_d5=0, for the successive short line blocks (no empty line, notation line, or other block
between blocks) with short movement distance and fast executed speed, the CNC realizes the
optimal speed connection transition by adopting the advanced preview control mode. Up to 80
blocks can be pre-read.
d4__Cutting command
0: Continuous smooth transition.
1: Deceleration to 0.
// In G01, G02, G03 cutting feed, when bit parameter P401_d4=0, the system employs
post-acceleration/deceleration. At the intersection of the paths of the two adjacent cutting feed
blocks, an arc transition is formed due to the acceleration/deceleration. In such a case, the
intersection of the two paths cannot be precisely positioned, so there is an error between actual
path and programmed path. To prevent such a contour error, insert a delay command (G04)
between the two blocks or set the system bit parameter P401_d4 to 1. At this moment, the former
block decelerates to 0 when it moves to the block end point, precisely positioning at the end point.
Then the system proceeds to the next cutting feed block; in this mode, however, because each
block starts to accelerate from 0 speed, and the next block is not executed until it decelerates to 0
at the end point. Thus, the program run time will increase, reducing the machining efficiency.
d3__ Execution sequence of multiple commands in the same block
0： step by step。
1: Simultaneously. // It is referred to as multiple blocks in the same block when a block contains
several commands. The commands in the same block are executed at the
same time; after all the commands are executed, the next block is executed
114
// When P401_d3=1, the execution is simultaneous execution; in this mode, the irrelative
commands are executed almost at the same time, without following the execution sequence of
step by step or waiting for each other. However, for those M codes with interlock relationship, the
system automatically arranges the execution sequence according to the parameter.
// When P401_d3=0, the execution is performed step by step; the non-simultaneous execution
sequence is as follows: after a function command is executed, the next function command can be
Ⅰ
executed; till all of them are executed.
d2__ Rapid block skip execution function
OPERATION
0: OFF
1: ON. // Under the premise that P401_d3=1, P401_d2=1 is valid. When P401_d2=1, the rapid
block skip execution is allowed. In the mode, as long as the axis move commands in
the current block are executed (without waiting for the completion of the execution of
other MST commands), the system rapidly skips to the next block to execute.
d1__G92 Run-out
0: Optimized. //When there is run-out in G92, the run-out axis directly retracts to the start point of
G92 if there is only I; thus enhancing the efficiency and improving the run-out effect.
1: Common. // The run-out is performed according to the G92 run-out mode described in Section
4.13.2 in Part Ⅱ Programming.
d0__Cutting efficiency
0: Normal state. // The cutting speed is the normal value set by cutting feed command F.
1: Optimized. // The cutting efficiency is improved by 5% by optimizing the speed; which applies to
the situation that F is not modified, but efficiency needs to be improved.
4.6.4.9 Relationship between Path and Parameters of Running and Efficiency
1) When P401_ d4=0, it is the cutting command continuous smooth transition. The system
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is valid:
Processing of G01:
When P401_ d5=0, G01 command has the acceleration/deceleration function before
interpolation, and the connection transition between G01 and G02 is performed at the optimal speed;
then the system performs the acceleration/deceleration processing after interpolation; When the
cutting speed is high, the line segment path is accurate, and the transition point is smooth. In this
case, the acceleration/deceleration function after interpolation does not have much effect on the
path precision.
When P401_ d5=1, G01 command does not employs high-speed connection. It directly
performs the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation instead of acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation.
Processing of an arc
When P400_ d2=0, it is the path precise processing when the arc crosses the vertex. The arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration function before interpolation. The speed decelerates to
115
the start speed when the quadrant is crossed, then the backlash is performed, and the machining
path transits to the next quadrant, then accelerates, and then decelerates before the end. Finally the
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is performed.
When P400_ d2=1, it is the smooth processing when the arc passes the vertex; the arc
command directly performs the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation without performing the
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
Ⅰ
2）When P401_ d4=1, the cutting command decelerates to 0; the deceleration function after
OPERATION
interpolation is invalid:
Processing of G01:
interpolation, and the connection transition between G01 and G02 is performed at the optimal speed;
all the G01 commands decelerate to 0 speed when moving to the end point of the block, and are
positioned at the end point precisely; when the cutting speed is high, the line segment path is
accurate, and the transition point is smooth.
interpolation. Each cutting command decelerates to 0 after it is executed.
Processing of an arc
When P400_ d2=0, it is the path precise processing when the arc passes the vertex. The arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration function before interpolation. The speed decelerates to
the start speed when the quadrant is passed, then the backlash is performed, and the machining
path transits to the next quadrant, then accelerates, and then decelerates before the end.
When P400_ d2=1, it is the smooth processing when the arc passes the convex; the arc
command has the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. If the backlash is 0, the
deceleration is not performed when the quadrant is passed.
4.6.4.10 Bit Parameters of Safety and Debugging__ P402～P404, P419
【Safety setting 1】_ Bit parameter P402 (password level: 3)

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
d7__ Hard limit alarm

// This parameter specifies the processing mode when the hard limit alarm signal is detected during
axis movement.
0: Deceleration. // When it set to 0, the move axis decelerates to stop if the hard limit alarm
occurs. The coordinate is the same as the actual position.
1: Emergency stop. // When it is set to 1, the move axis immediately stops after the hard limit
alarm occurs. The coordinate may not be the same as the actual position.
d6__Spindle abnormal stop detection
0: Performed. // If the spindle stops during cutting, the system stops the feed and turns off the
spindle, with an alarm being issued.
116
1: Not performed.
// In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, after the spindle is started, the system automatically detects
the spindle speed. If the spindle is not started normally, the system prompts “Spindle rotation
abnormality”. If the spindle stops rotating by accident during cutting feed, the system will stop the
feed, suspend the program execution and turn off the spindle, issuing an alarm.
// When the spindle is required to work at a very low speed (lower than 1 r/min), the system may
Ⅰ
issue an alarm by mistake. In this case, the user should set the parameter to 1. For the
frequency-conversion spindle, when the programmed speed is lower than S0, the system will not
OPERATION
perform detection or give an alarm.
d5__ Interlock between chuck and spindle
0: Is performed. // When it interlocks with the spindle, the chuck cannot be controlled before the
spindle stops; the spindle cannot be started neither when the chuck is not
clamped tightly.
1: Is released. // When the interlock between chuck and spindle is released, neither the spindle
starting is affected by the state of the chuck, nor the chuck control is affect by the
state of the spindle.
d4__ Chuck response signal consecutive detection alarm is
0: Not issued.
1: Issued. // This bit indicates whether to detect the state of the chuck in real time. Anytime the
chuck is released, an alarm is issued. This control bit is valid only when there is a
response signal for the chuck (P409_ d5=1).
d3__Interlock between tailstock and spindle
0: Is performed. // When the tailstock interlocks with the spindle, the tailstock cannot be controlled
before the spindle stops; the spindle cannot be started neither when the tailstock
is not clamped tightly.
1: Is released. // When the interlock between tailstock and spindle is released, neither the spindle
starting is affected by the state of the tailstock, nor the tailstock control is affect by
the state of the spindle
d2__ Tailstock response signal consecutive detection alarm is
0. Not issued.
1: Issued // This bit indicates whether to detect the state of the tailstock in real time. Anytime the
tailstock is released, an alarm is issued. This control bit is valid only when there is a
response signal for the tailstock (setting parameter P519, P520).
d1__ Auto MPG control
0: Disabled. // In AUTO operation mode, using MPG to control the rapid/feed override is invalid.
1: Enabled. // In AUTO operation mode, using MPG to control the rapid/feed override is valid.
d0__Auto MPG mode
0: Mode 1. // In AUTO operation mode, use mode 1 to control MPG rapid/feed override.
1: Mode 2. // In AUTO operation mode, use mode 2 to control MPG rapid/feed override. For
details about mode 1 and mode 2, please refer to Section 4.5 Auto Operation Mode
117
in PartⅠOperation.
【Safety setting 2】__Bit parameter P403（password level：3）

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
d7__ Tool change operation

0: Allowed. // Tool change is allowed in MANUAL and AUTO states.
Ⅰ
1: Forbidden. // Tool change is forbidden in MANUAL and AUTO states.

OPERATION
d6__ Tool Offset operation mode is

0: Coordinate modification. // The tool offset operation mode in MANUAL state is machine
coordinate modification.
1: Tool post movement. // Tool offset operation mode in MANUAL state is tool post movement.
d5__Manual tool change
0: Confirmed by a key. // During tool change in MANUAL state, the system prompts Confirm tool
change?, then you can execute tool change by pressing ENTER key.
1: Performed immediately. // Tool change is performed immediately in MANUAL state.
d4__ Tool setting record check
0: OFF. // The program compound check prompt alarm caused by inconsistence with the tool
setting record is not displayed.
1: ON. // The tool setting record has been set in the tool offset number. When the other tool
numbers still use this tool offset number during programming, the system displays
[Program compound check prompt alarm]. E.g. T0205 is inconsistent with the tool
setting record T0105.
d3__ M output during emergency stop
0: Only the spindle and coolant are turned off. // When the emergency stop alarm is valid, the
system only turns off the output signals of the spindle, coolant and lubricant.
1: All are turned off. //When the emergency stop alarm is valid, the system turns off all the output
signals of the auxiliary functions.
d2__ By pressing Reset key, M function output is
0: Turned off. // After pressing Reset key, the system turns off the output signals of M03, M04,
M08, M32.
1: Not turned off. // After pressing Reset key, the system does not turn off the output signals of
M03, M04, M08, M32.
d1__ During M function alarm
0: The program is terminated. // The program is terminated during M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx
function alarm.
1: Selection is prompted. // The system prompts whether to retry during M10 M11 M78 M79 Txx
function alarm.
// When the conditions that P401_d3=0 (execution step by step in a block with multiple commands)
and P403_d1=1 (Prompt in M function alarm) are satisfied simultaneously, the retry function is valid.
118
Otherwise, the system issues an alarm and terminates the machining program when the relative
commands cannot be completed.
In the process of automatic machining, the commands that can be retried are: T commands, chuck
(M10/M11) control and tailstock (M78/M79) control.
When executing these commands, if the corresponding valid input signal is not detected, the
commands cannot be completed within a specified period of time, then the system prompts whether to
Ⅰ
retry. After the retry message appears, the system is at the pause state; at this moment, the operator can
check relative input signals and remove the fault in terms of the prompted message.
OPERATION
After the fault is removed, press R key to re-execute the command which caused the fault. After the
retry operation is correctly completed, the system is at the pause state, and the user can continue the
machining by pressing CYCLE START key. If the retry execution is still incorrect, you can perform the
retry operation several times; if the command cannot be executed correctly after multiple retry
operations, you can exit the machining program by pressing ESC key.
d0__ Waiting for the speed to be stable before thread machining is
0: Not performed. // Whether the spindle speed is stable is not detected before thread machining.
1: Performed. // Whether the spindle speed is stable is detected by the system automatically
before thread machining. The system machines threads after the speed is
stable.
// This parameter is valid for G33, G92, G32 commands.
// The system detects the spindle speed in an instant. If it detects the spindle is in the progress of
acceleration or deceleration, it does not machine the threads until the progress is finished. If the thread
command is executed immediately after the speed is changed, the function of detecting whether the
spindle speed is stable may be invalid.
E.g., in S1000 stable state, when executing S200, if G33 command is executed immediately, the
system will immediately execute the program for detecting whether the speed is stable. In this case, the
system misjudges the speed is stable in S1000 stable state; because there is a time difference between
system command and spindle speed actual change. To prevent the misjudgment, specify a delay of 0.3s
between S200 and G33.
When the spindle is required to work at a very low speed (lower than 10 r/min) to cut threads, the
system may remain in the state of detecting whether the spindle speed is stable for a long time; in this
case, set this parameter to 0 to cancel this function.
【Safety setting 3】__Bit parameter P419（password level：3）
d7 d6 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
d7__ Turning off spindle during driver alarm is

0: Not performed. // When the system detects the driver unit alarm, it does not turn off the spindle.
1: Performed. // When the system detects the drive unit alarm, it turns off the spindle.
d6__ M state change during machining is
0: Not prompted. // The system does prompt the state change of the spindle, chuck and tailstock.
1: Prompted. // The system displays a window to prompt the state change of the spindle, chuck
and tailstock.
119
// In AUTO machinig, it is require to pause sometimes, e.g., after the pause, turn off the spindle for
observation, then turn on the spindle, and press CYCLE START key to continue the machining. If the
execution is continued witihout turning off the spindle, unexpected accidents may occur. Setting bit
parameter P419_d6 to 1 can provide protection to some extent. When P419_d6=1, at the beginning of
the signle block or pause, the system needs to memorize the states of the spindle (M3/M4/M5),
chuck(M10/M11) and tailstock (M78/M79). If some operations are performed afterwards, the system first
judges whether the state is consistent with the previous one after CYCLE START key is pressed. If the
Ⅰ
states are inconsistent with each other, a window pops up to prompt the changed contents. In such a
OPERATION
case, you can recover the state by another operation, or press Y key to continue the execution; after N
key is pressed to exit, the window displaying prompts for M3/M4/M5, M10/M11, M78/M79 dispappears,
and the system returns to the pause state.
【Debugging setting】__Bit parameter P404 (password level: 2)
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
This parameter is set for the convenience of the system debugging. In the online state, it must be
set to the valid state. Otherwise, it cannot provide protection.
d7__Emergency stop alarm is
0: Detected. // The external emergency stop signal function is valid.
1: Shielded. // The external emergency stop signal function is invalid.
d6__Hard limit alarm
0: Detected. // The hard limit alarm function is valid.
1: Shielded. // The hard limit alarm function is invalid.
d5__Drive unit alarm
0: Detected. // The drive unit alarm function is valid.
1: Shielded. // The drive unit alarm function is invalid.
d4__Mechanical soft limit alarm
0: Valid. // The mechanical soft limit alarm function is valid.
1: Invalid. // The mechanical soft limit alarm function is invalid.
d3__Tool nose soft limit alarm
0: Valid. // The tool nose soft limit alarm function is valid.
1: Invalid. // Tool nose soft limit alarm function is invalid.
d2__254 Program limit
0: Forbidding move command. // All G codes (other than G04) in M60～M74 blocks are
forbidden.
1: Allowed. // M60～M74 are user-defined commands. When the program is written according to
the program format, it is allowed that the blocks contain G move codes.
d1__Hard limit alarm level
0: Low. // The hard limit alarm low level is valid.
1: High. // The hard limit alarm high level is valid.
120
d0__ No. 254 program solidification limit

0: Forbidden. // It is forbidden to modify or re-solidify No. 254 program, i.e. it is forbidden to
modify the self-defined command.
1: Allowed. // It is allowed to modify and re-solidify No. 254 program, i.e. it is allowed to modify the
self-defined command.
Ⅰ
Whether to modify and then re-solidify the solidified program is determined by the
machine tool builder.
OPERATION
4.6.4.11 Bit Parameter of Motor Driver__ P405
【Motor driver】__Bit parameter P405（password level：2）

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
This parameter sets the motor working state and whether there is the Y axis control.
d7__Z axis motor direction;
d6__X axis motor direction;
d5__Y axis motor direction;
0: Positive.
1: Negative. // By setting the parameter for the motor direction, it is available to change the
motor rotation direction without changing other external conditions. Make the tool
post actual movement direction the same as the system-defined direction.
d4__Z axis drive unit alarm level;
d3__X axis drive unit alarm level;
d2__Y axis drive unit alarm level;
0: High. // When the input signal of drive unit alarm for Z, X, Y axis is the high level, “Drive unit
alarm” is issued.
1: Low. // When the input signal of drive unit alarm for Z, X, Y axis is the low level, “Drive unit
alarm” is issued.
d1__Control axis
0: Without Y axis. // It is forbidden to use Y axis move command.
1: With Y axis. // The control axis has Y axis, and Y axis move command is allowed. Note: 928TD
has no Y axis function.
d0__Motor acceleration/deceleration control
0: Linear. // The motor acceleration/deceleration adopts the linear control.
1: Exponential. // The motor acceleration/deceleration curve is an exponential curve or adjusted
exponential curve.
4.6.4.12 Parameters of Other Interfaces__ P412, P330～P332
【relative Interface】__Bit parameter P412（password level: 2）
121
d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved d2 d1 d0
d7__External start/pause signal
0: Disabled. // The external start and pause signals are invalid.
1： Enabled。 // The external start and pause signals are valid.
d6__External feed hold knob
0: Disabled. // The system external interface for the feed/spindle hold knob is invalid.
Ⅰ
1: Enabled. // The system external interface for the feed/spindle hold knob interface is valid.
d5__ Function of detecting low pressure
OPERATION
0: Not provided.
1: Provided. // The system is provided with the low pressure detection function; P412_d4 sets
the alarm level.
d4__Low pressure alarm level
0: High. // Disconnected with 0 V.
1: Low. // Connected with 0 V. After the system low pressure alarm detection function is selected,
the Low pressure alarm is issued once the system detects the low pressure alarm
signal PRES is valid and the signal hold time exceeds the set value of data parameter
P332; at this moment, the axis feed pauses, the spindle stops, and the automatic cycle
cannot start.
d2__ Executing M73 in MANUAL/AUTO reset is
0: Not performed. // In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, by pressing the reset key, the system
only executes the standard reset function.
1: Performed. // In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, by pressing the reset key, the system
executes the solidified M73 self-defined command after executing the standard
reset function.
d1__Executing M74 in MANUAL/ATUO emergency stop
0: Not performed. // In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the system only executes the standard
emergency stop function when the emergency stop alarm is valid.
1: Performed. // In MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the emergency stop alarm is valid. The
system will execute the solidified M74 self-defined command after executing the
standard emergency stop function.
d0__Macro programming for auxiliary function output pin
0: Disabled. // It is forbidden to perform the statement programming to the defined dedicated
pins of the input signals. It is only allowed to perform the statement
programming to the pins which display “UO” on the diagnosis page. It is
forbidden for M81, M82, M83 commands to program the defined dedicated pins
of input signals, but to program the pins which display “UO” on the diagnosis
page.
1: Enabled. // It is allowed to perform the statement programming to the pins of all input signals.
【Automatic lubrication start time (s)】__Auxiliary parameter P330:
This parameter determines the lubrication start time. (Unit: s)
122
【Automatic lubrication interval time (s)】__Auxiliary parameter P331

This parameter determines the automatic lubrication time interval. (Unit: s)
【Hold time of low pressure alarm（s）】__Auxiliary parameter P332
This parameter determines if the low pressure signal hold time exceeds the value set in P332, the
system issues an alarm. (Unit: s)
Ⅰ
4.6.4.13 Other Parameters__ P413～P416, P333
OPERATION
【Interface language】__Bit parameter P413 (password level: 2)
d7 d6 d5 Reserved d3 Reserved Reserved Reserved
d7__Interface language
0: Chinese. // The interface is displayed in Chinese.
1: English. // The interface is displayed in English.
d6__System parameter and programming
0: Diameter. // The command value of X axis in the program is input in diameter, and the
coordinate of X axis is displayed in diameter.
1: Radius. // The command value of X axis in the program is input in radius, and the coordinate
o f X axis is displayed in radius.
// The coordinate value of X axis in the system can be expressed in radius and diameter. When
modifying this bit parameter, the system will prompt whether to convert the parameter. If the
conversion is confirmed, the system will convert the reference coordinate parameters P001, P004,
P007, P011, P012, P017, P018, P022 and P025.
// After modifying this bit parameter, it is required to re-perform tool setting and programming.
Otherwise, the data in X axis direction is incorrect.
d5__Coordinate system setting
0: Front tool post. // The definition of the front tool post is shown in figure 1-1 in Chapter One in
Part Ⅱ Programming．
1：Rear tool post. // The definition of the rear tool post is shown in figure 1-2 in Chapter One in
Part ⅡProgramming.
// This parameter is used only for displaying the icon of the imaginary tool nose number visually in
manual tool setting; during manual tool setting, the system uses this parameter to judge whether the
front tool post coordinate system or rear tool post coordinate system is used, in order to correctly display
the position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose.
// 928TD does not support the tool nose radius compensation function.
d3__ Lease command increment
0: Metric. // The unit of the command value in the program is mm.
1: Inch. // The unit of the command value in the program is inch. (This option is invalid currently.)
123
【Communication interface】__Bit parameter P414 (password level：2)

d7 d6 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved d0
d7__Baudrate select（valid when P414_d6=0）

0： 9600。
1： 19200。 Bit select Baudrate
Ⅰ
d6__Baudrate select (prior) d7 =0， d6 =0 9600
0: Decided by d7. d7 =1， d6 =0 19200

OPERATION
d7 =0，d6=1 38400
1： 38400。
d7 =1，d6=1
d0__Bit of debugging function
0: Normal state. // The user generally sets it to the normal state.
1: Debugging state. // Used when debugging the software.
【Display interface】__Bit parameter P415（password level：3）
d7 Reserved Reserved Reserved d3 Reserved Reserved Reserved
d7__ Prompting range in parameter interface

0: OFF. // The parameter range prompt is turned off;
1: ON. // The parameter range prompt is turned on.
d3__Diagnosis interface prompt
0: OFF. // The prompt message in diagnosis mode is turned off.
1: ON. // The prompt message in diagnosis mode is turned on.
【Function switch】__Bit parameter P416（password level：3）
d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved Reserved d1 d0
d7__ Memorizing the current password level

0: Not performed. // The parameter password level is not memorized. When entering the
parameter password input interface, Please input user password is
displayed.
1: Performed. // The parameter password level is memorized. The last parameter setting
interface memorized by the system is entered.
d6__Operation of deleting all programs in EDIT mode
0: Enabled. // In EDIT mode, it is allowed to delete all the programs in the system.
1: Disabled. // In EDIT mode, it is forbidden to delete all the programs in the system.
d5__ Operation of clearing all tool offset in tool offset mode
0: Allowed. // In tool offset mode, it is allowed to delete all the tool offset values.
1: Disabled. // In tool offset mode, it is forbidden to delete all the tool offset values.
d4__Turning off driver unit enabling in MANUAL mode
0: Disabled. // It is forbidden to turn off the drive unit by pressing “DELETE” key in MANUAL state.
1: Enabled. // It is allowed to turn off the drive unit by pressing “DELETE” key in MANUAL state.
124
d1__ Parameter display select

0: All are displayed. // According to the parameter password level, both the parameters alterable
and unalterable are displayed.
1: Alterable items are displayed. // According to the parameter password level, only the alterable
parameters rather than all parameters can be displayed.
d0__Program modification in EDIT mode
Ⅰ
0: Enabled. // The program lock function is invalid, and it is allowed to modify the program using
keys on the operation panel in EDIT mode.
OPERATION
1: Disabled. // The program lock function is valid. It is forbidden to modify the program using keys
in EDIT mode. Otherwise, the system issues an alarm.
【Program line number auto interval】__Auxiliary parameter P333
In the Edit operation mode, this parameter determines the increment from last program line number
to current one, i.e. the difference value between two line numbers.
【Y axis rotation clear coordinate】__ Reference coordinate parameter P027
928TD does not support this function.
When Y axis is used for spindle or worktable rotation control, the user should set the counting range
of the rotation coordinate in this parameter. E.g. When Y axis rotates 360 degrees, P027 should be set
to 360.000; when Y axis is moving, its tool nose and machine coordinates change circularly within the
range of 0~359.999.
When P027 is 0, the rotation axis coordinate clearing function is invalid. Range of P207: 0～9999.
【Record alarm】__Bit parameter P417（password level: 2）
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Parameter P417 is for setting whether to record the contents of alarms. When the bit parameter is set
to 0, the system records the alarm messages; when changing a part program or during the emergency
alarm or alarms in MANUAL/AUTO operation mode, the system automatically records the alarm without
bit parameter setting; alarm messages of the system are classified into the following types:
P417 bit parameter P418 bit parameter

Alarm message
(record or not) (display or not)
Alarms in parameter/tool offset operation mode
d7 d7
(E001~ E099)
d6 d6 Alarms in EDIT operation mode (E101~ E199)
Alarms relative to program (E201~ E299, E601~
d5 d5
E699)
d4 d4 M03/M04/M05 start/stop operation
d3 d3 Tool change T operation
d0 Emergency stop alarm, alarms in
MANUAL/AUTO mode (E301~ E499)
Program change in EDIT operation mode
125
d7__Recording parameter/tool compensation is

0: Performed. // The alarm messages in parameter/tool offset operation mode are
recorded.
1: Not performed. // The alarm messages in parameter/tool offset operation mode are not
recorded.
d6, d5, d4, d3__ Recording edit alarm, program alarm, spindle alarm, tool change alarm is
0: Performed.
Ⅰ
1: Not performed.
OPERATION
【Display alarm】__Bit parameter P418 (password level: 3)

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 Reserved Reserved d0
Parameter P418 sets whether to display the alarm messages recorded by the system. When the bit
parameter is set to 0, the system displays the alarm messages; the system automatically displays all the
messages about program change, without bit parameter setting; The system displays the alarm
messages as follows:
d7__ Displaying parameter/tool compensation is
0: Performed. // The alarm messages recorded by the system in parameter/tool offset
operation mode are displayed.
1: Not performed. // The alarm messages recorded by the system in parameter/tool offset
operation mode are not displayed.
d6, d5, d4, d3, d0__ Displaying edit/program/spindle/ tool change alarm, emergency stop in
MANUAL/AUTO is
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
【Note】
1) Alarm record is only a search function provided in some special cases; it is suggested that the
operator not operate it without special reasons.
4.6.4.14 Parameters of Interface __P500～P556
In addition to the control and detection functions for the main devices, like spindle, chuck, tailstock
and tool post, this system also provides the control and detection functions for the additional devices
such as the signal lamp, lubrication and safety door. The former occupies the fixed signal pins. However,
the system does not set fixed signal pins for the additional devices due to the limited number of pins.
They are set by the machine tool builder based on the actual conditions.
If the unused signals for the main devices are released, it is available to add the signals required by
the additional devices by means of interface parameter setting. In this case, the system can realize the
control and detection for the additional devices.
First judge what the interface parameter occupies is the input or output interface. P500～P510 are
output interface parameters, and P511～P540 are input interface parameters.
126
Parameters P541～P556 are used for the multiple-station tool number signal encoding. When bit
parameter P408_d7 is set to 1 (tool number signal detection mode: Table checking), parameters P541～
P556 are used for setting the tool number check signal.
If the interface parameter value is not 0, the input or output interface is occupied; If the set value is
the sequence number of a common signal name, it means the pin corresponding to the common signal
name of the occupied input or output. If the initial value of the interface parameter is 0, the function of
Ⅰ
this parameter is not used, i.e. the pin is not occupied.
If the pin of input or output is already occupied by other functions, the interface parameter cannot be
OPERATION
set to the occupied common signal name, and the system prompts: [Parameter alarm] – Illegal I/O
setting, this input or output pin has been occupied.
It is allowed to view those unoccupied pins, which are displayed in white and whose names are
displayed with common signal names, on the diagnosis page. The pin numbers of input or output on the
diagnosis page are arranged from top to bottom, and from left to right, which increase from number 1.
For the standard definition and use of the interface parameters, please refer to Section 4.6.5.8
Interface Parameter List in the appendix of this chapter.
【Example】
Setting P511 SAGT to 5 indicates that SAGT occupies the output interface UI05; System UI05 pin
inputs the safety door detection function.
Setting P506 M32O to 9 indicates that M32O occupies the output interface UO09; The system
UO09 pin outputs the lubrication control function.
4.6.4.15 Initial Values of Variables __P600～P639
The initial values of variable parameters P600～P639 correspond to the variable initial values
r001～r040; for details about the variable explanation, please refer to Chapter Severn Statement
Programming in PartⅡ Programming
Note: 928TD has no statement programming function.
4.6.4.16 Parameters of G76 __P336～P339
When using G76 command, the information about the thread machining can be notified in advance,
then the system automatically arranges the thread cutting, and finally machines the threads conforming
to the requirements.
【G76 tool angle P】__Auxiliary parameter P336
This parameter determines the angle between two adjacent teeth threads. The actual thread angle
is decided by the tool angle. Therefore, P336 should be the same as the tool angle. Unit: Degree.
【G76 fine turning times L】__Auxiliary parameter P337
This parameter determines the number of times for the thread fine turning.
127
【G76 fine turning cutting amount R】__ Auxiliary parameter P338

This parameter determines the cutting amount for the thread fine turning. Unit: mm.
【G76 rough turning minimum cutting amount Q】__ Auxiliary parameter P339
This parameter determines the minimum cutting amount in the thread rough turning. Unit: mm.
【Note】
1) When the system is executing G76 command ①, it will automatically set the values of words P,
Ⅰ
L, R, Q of G76 command ① into their corresponding parameters P336, P337, P338, P339
respectively, because these parameter items need to be used in executing command ②.
OPERATION
2) When P, L, R, Q in G76 command ① are entirely or partially omitted, the execution of G76 ② is
performed by the set values of parameters P336, P337, P338, P339.
4.6.5 Appendix Parameter List
4.6.5.1 Reference Parameter List

Parameter Parameter User
Parameter designation Unit Initial value Range
No. level backup
P000 3 Z program reference point mm 200.000 -99999.999～
P001 3 X program reference point mm 150.000 +99999.999
P002 3 Y program reference point mm 100.000
P003 2nd program reference
3 mm 210.000
point of Z axis
3 mm 160.000
point of X axis
3 mm 110.000
point of Y axis
P006 3rd program reference
3 mm 220.000
point of Z axis
3 mm 170.000
point of X axis
3 mm 120.000
point of Y axis
P009 + direction tool nose soft
3 mm 8000.000
limit of Z axis
P010 - direction tool nose soft
3 mm -8000.000
limit of Z axis
3 mm 8000.000
limit of X axis
3 mm -8000.000
limit of X axis
3 mm 8000.000
limit of Y axis
3 mm -8000.000
limit of Y axis
P015 + direction mechanical soft
2 mm 8000.000
limit of Z axis
P016 - direction mechanical soft
2 mm -8000.000
limit of Z axis
2 mm 8000.000
limit of X axis
2 mm -8000.000
limit of X axis
2 mm 8000.000
limit of Y axis
128

2 mm -8000.000
limit of Y axis
P021 1 Z axis zero coordinate mm 300.000
P022 1 X axis zero coordinate mm 200.000
P023 1 Y axis zero coordinate mm 200.000
P024 Z axis zero point offset 0～10
2 mm 0
value
P025 X axis zero point offset 0～10
2 mm 0
value
P026 Y axis zero point offset 0～10
Ⅰ
2 mm 0
value
P027 Y axis rotation zeroing 0～9999
2 0
OPERATION
coordinate
4.6.5.2 Motion Parameter List

Stepper Servo
Parameter Parameter User
Parameter designation Unit initial initial Range
No. level backup
value value
P100 Maximum rapid traverse
2 mm/min 5000 8000 1～15000
rate limit for Z axis
2 mm/min 2500 4000 1～15000
rate limit for X axis
2 mm/min 5000 6000 1～15000
rate limit for Y axis
P103 Minimum start speed for Z
2 mm/min 300 600 1～10000
axis
P104 Minimum start speed for X
2 mm/min 150 300 1～10000
axis
P105 Minimum start speed for Y
2 mm/min 300 600 1～10000
axis
P106 Z axis rapid feed
2 acceleration/deceleration ms 400 150 1～12000
time (ms)
P107 X axis rapid
(ms)
P108 Y axis rapid feed
time (ms)
P109 Zero return low speed of Z
1 mm/min 100 100 0～2000
axis
P110 Zero return low speed of X
1 mm/min 100 100 0～2000
axis
P111 Zero return low speed of Y
1 mm/min 100 100 0～2000
axis
P112 2 Cutting feed initial speed mm/min 100 200 1～2000
P113 2 Maximum speed limit for mm/min 4000 6000 1～5000
Cutting feed
P114 2 Linear ms 500 200 1～12000
acceleration/deceleration
time for cutting feed (ms)
P115 Exponential ms 500 200 1～12000
2 acceleration/deceleration
time for cutting feed (ms)
P116 Acceleration/deceleration ms 400 150 1～8000
2 time for thread cutting
(ms)
P117 Acceleration/deceleration ms 300 150 1～8000
2 time for thread run-out
(ms)
P118 2 G99 initial lines 0 0 0～30000
P119 Delay when positioning is ms 100 100 0～8000
2
switched to cutting (ms)
129
4.6.5.3 Drive Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Initial User
Parameter designation Unit Range
No. level value backup
P200 2 Z axis backlash mm 0.000
P201 2 X axis backlash mm 0.000 0～10.000
P202 2 Y axis backlash mm 0.000
P203 Z axis command pulse
1 1
multiplier
P204 Z axis command pulse
1 1
Ⅰ
division coefficient
P205 X axis command pulse
1 1
multiplier
OPERATION
1～99999
P206 X axis command pulse
1 1
P207 Y axis command pulse
1 1
multiplier
P208 Y axis command pulse
1 1
P209 1 Spindle encoder lines 1200 100～5000
P210 0 Undefined (reserved) 0.000 -1.000～1.000
4.6.5.4 Auxiliary Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Initial User
Parameter designation Unit Range
No. level value backup
P300 2 Maximum speed for spindle M41 r/min 3000
gear
gear 0～99999
gear
gear
P304 2 Spindle minimum speed limit in r/min 100
constant surface speed
P305 2 Spindle maximum speed limit in r/min 8000
constant surface speed
P306 2 Thread smooth speed boundary r/min 100 1～9999
P307 2 Thread spindle fluctuation alarm r/min 300 1～99999
P308 2 Spindle JOG time (ms) ms 0 0～99999
P309 2 Speed in spindle JOG r/min 200 0～99999
P310 1 Lines occupied by spindle gear 4 0～4
control
P311 2 Gear shift time 1 of the variable ms 100 1～99999
frequency spindle (ms)
P312 2 Gear shift time 2 of the variable ms 100 1～99999
frequency spindle (ms)
P313 2 Interval time for spindle gear shift ms 100 1～99999
（(ms)
P314 2 Output voltage during spindle mV 0 0～10000
gear shift (mV
P315 2 Delay time from spindle stop to ms 100 1～99999
spindle brake (ms)
P316 2 Spindle brake output time (ms) ms 1000 1～99999
P317 2 Spindle maximum speed limit r/min 8000 1～99999
P318 1 Tool post type (0__9) 1 0～9
P319 1 Maximum tool number 4 1～16
P320 1 Lines occupied by tool post 4 1～8
signal
P321 2 Tool change time T1 (ms) ms 100 1～99999
130

P324 2 Tool post CCW rotation clamping ms 1000 1～99999
time (ms)
P325 2 Tool change rotation time limit ms 10000 1～99999
(ms)
P326 2 Spindle control pulse time (ms) ms 10 1～99999
P327 2 Chuck control pulse time (ms) ms 10 1～99999
P328 2 Tailstock control pulse time (ms) ms 10 1～99999
P329 M code response detection time ms 5000 1～99999
2
(ms)
Ⅰ
P330 Automatic lubrication start time s 60 0～99999.999
3
(s)
OPERATION
P331 Automatic lubrication interval s 600 0～99999.999
3
time (s)
P332 Hold time of low pressure alarm s 600 0.001～
3
（s） 99999.999
P333 Program line number automatic
3 10 0～100
interval
P334 1 Automatic machining time limit h 0 0～100000
P336 3 G76 tool angle P deg 0.000 0～99.000
P337 3 G76 fine turning times L 1 1～99
P338 G76 fine turning cutting amount
3 mm 0.000 0～99.999
R
P339 G76 rough turning minimum
3 mm 0.000 0～99.999
cutting amount Q
P341 Cutting enabled when rotation

2 0 0～90
speed reaches the percentage
4.6.5.5 Bit Parameter List

The corresponding bits of the bit parameters are set to 0 or 1 to realize different control functions,
thus satisfying the requirements of different machine tools.
Parameter Parameter Parameter User
Initial value Range
No. level designation backup
P400 3 Running setting 00000100
P401 3 Efficiency setting 00000000
P402 2 Safety setting 1 01000000
P404 2 Debugging setting 00000000
P405 2 Motor drive 00011100
P406 1 Zero point setting 1 00000000
P407 1 Zero point setting 2 00000000
P408 2 Tool post setting 00000000
P409 1 Chuck tailstock 00000000
(hydraulic system)
P410 1 Spindle configuration 00000000 00000000～11111111
P411 2 Precision 00000010
compensation
P412 2 Other interfaces 00000000
P413 2 Interface language 00000000
P414 2 Communication 00000000
interface
P415 3 Display interface 10001000
P416 3 Function switch 00000000
P417 2 Record alarm 00000000
P418 3 Display alarm 00000000
131
4.6.5.6 Interface Parameter List
Parameter Parameter Signal Function Standard definition I/O Initial Range User
No. level designation explanation and use value backup
P500 1 M21O User O 17
command
output
P501 1 M23O User O 18
command
output
Ⅰ
P502 1 LMP3 Program run For tricolor light O 0

signal light 3 control (green light)
P503 1 LMP2 Alarm light For tricolor light O 0
OPERATION
control control (yellow light)

signal 2
P504 1 LMP1 Alarm light For tricolor light O 0
control control (red light)
signal 1
P505 1 MDLY Machine O 0
electricity 0～99
delay
power-on
control
signal
P506 1 M32O Lubrication For controlling the O 0

control lubrication switch on
switch the machine tool
P507 1 TZD Tool post Applicable to
worktable SWD120, AK31,
brake output SBWD-80 tool post
P508 1 TFD Tool post Applicable to AK31,
pre-indexing SBWD-80 tool post
output
P509 1 A001 Reserved
P510 1 A002 Reserved
P511 1 SAGT Safety door For detecting the I 0
detection state of the machine
safety door
P512 1 Dalm Feed device For detecting the I 0
alarm state of the feed
detection device when
executing M230
P513 1 M41I Gear shift Using the I 0
in-position frequency-conversion
signal spindle in-position
detection signal M41
P514 1 M42I Gear shift Using the 1 0
P517 1 M91I User I 7
command
input
P518 1 M93I User I 8
command
input
132
P519 1 RM78 Tailstock Used when using a I 0

advancing hydraulic tailstock
in-position
detection
P520 1 RM79 Spindle Used when suing a I 0
retracting hydraulic tailstock
in-position
detection
P521 1 Wsp External Applicable to an I 0
MPG external MPG
emergency
Ⅰ
stop
P522 1 WsY External Applicable to an I 0
OPERATION
MPG axis external MPG
select Y
P523 1 WsX External Applicable to an I 0
select X
P524 1 WsZ External Applicable to an I 0
select Z
P525 1 Wbk2 External Applicable to an I 0
MPG external MPG
override 2
P526 1 Wbk1 External Applicable to an I 0
MPG external MPG
override 1
P528 1 TFDC Pre-indexing Applicable to AK31, I 0
in-position SBWD-80 tool post
detection
P529 1 TXT Tool number Applicable to AK31, I 0
strobe signal SBWD-80 tool post
P530 1 TGR Tool post Applicable to AK31, I 0
overheat SBWD-80 tool post
detection
P532 1 G31I G31 input G31 input interface I 6
detection
P533 1 M61I M61/M62 M61/M62 foot switch I 0
execution 0～32
switch and 99
execution
switch
execution
switch
P541 1 Number 1～ Used for I 0 0～
～ 16 tool multiple-station tool 255
P556 number post signal encoding
detection
signal
【Note】
1) When bit parameter P409_d4 =1 (the tailstock control function is invalid), the interfaces RM78, RM79 for tailstock
advancing/retracting in-position detection are invalid.
2) When bit parameter P410_d6 =0 (spindle S gear shift control), the interfaces M41I, M42I, M43I, M44I for gear
shift in-position signals are invalid.
4.6.5.7 Variable Initial Value List
Parameter No. Parameter Parameter Initial User

Range
level designation value backup
P600～P639 3 r001～r040 0 -99999999～99999999
133
4.6.5.8 Pitch Error Compensation Parameter List
PARA. Parameter designation (in Parameter designation (in Parameter

Parameter range
No. equal-space mode) unequal-space mode) range
Compensation value (um) -1000～+1000 1st compensation position 0～9999.999
P1000
point of Z axis (mm)
Compensation value (um) -1000～+1000 Compensation value of 1st -1000～+1000
P1001
point of Z axis (um)
P1002 Z axis compensation position 0-9999.999
～ Compensation value (um) -1000～+1000 point (mm) ~ Z axis ～
Ⅰ
P1299 compensation value (um) -1000～+1000

Compensation value (um) -1000～+1000 1st compensation position 0-9999.999
P1300
OPERATION
point of X axis (mm)

P1301
point of X axis (um)
Compensation value (um) -1000～+1000 1st compensation position 0～9999.999
P1600
point of Y axis (mm)
P1601
point of Y axis (mm)
Position of Z axis pitch
measurement start point
P1900 -9999.999～9999.999
on machine coordinate
system (mm)
Position of X axis pitch
measurement start point
P1901 -9999.999～9999.999
system (mm)
With the same
Position of Y axis pitch With the same names as the
ranges as the left
measurement start point left parameters
P1902 -9999.999～9999.999 parameters
system (mm)
Z axis pitch compensation 0～999.999
P1903
interval (mm)
X axis pitch compensation 0～999.999
P1904
interval (mm)
Y axis pitch compensation 0～999.999
P1905
interval (mm)
【Note】: 1. T level of all pitch error compensation parameters is 1.

2. Pitch error compensation interval range for P1903～P1905: 0～999.999, with the interval not smaller than
0.256 mm.
4.6.5.9 List of Parameters Relative to Command Disabling
Some command names in this system are forbidden to use due to the parameter setting relative to
them; once the parameter setting satisfies the conditions to forbid a command name, the system will
forbid the use of corresponding command and its function. The parameters relative to command
disabling are as follows:
Explanation: When the condition below is

Command name Command function
satisfied, the command is disabled.
M41～M44 Automatic spindle gear P410_d6 =0: Spindle S control: Gear shift
shift control
P410_d6=0 and P410_d5=0: only input S00～S04 in
S05～S16 Spindle S control spindle gear shift output
M47～M48 P410_d4=0: Spindle is switched to Y axis

M32～M33 Lubrication function Interface P506=0
M04 Spindle CCW rotation P410_d2=1: Spindle CCW rotation signal output is not
used.
134
M10～M11 Chuck P409_d7=1: The chuck control function is invalid.

clamping/releasing
M78～M79 Tailstock P409_d4=1: The tailstock control function is invalid.
advancing/retracting
Command relative to Y P405_d1=0: Without Y axis
axis
Pin programming P412_d0=0: The pin programming for auxiliary
r1001～r1032
command function output is not allowed.
Ⅰ
4.6.5.10 List of Parameters Relative to Output Interface Releasing
OPERATION
By parameter setting, the interfaces are not necessarily used for special signals. In this case, the
released interfaces can be used as common output interfaces; the interface parameters can be defined
as the released output interfaces. The parameters related to output interface releasing are as follows:
Released as a common signal by a

Special Common Variable
Function parameter
signal name signal name name
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function
M79 Tailstock retraction UO16 r2016
is invalid.
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function
M78 Tailstock advance UO15 r2015
is invalid.
P409_d7=1: The chuck control
M10 Chuck clamping UO14 r2014
function is invalid.
P409_d7=1: The chuck control
M11 Chuck releasing UO13 r2013
function is invalid.
Tool post CW P318=0: Line-up tool
TL+ rotation output UO12 r2012 P318=9 ： M60 tool change by a
signal self-defined command
P318=0: Line-up tool
Tool post CCW
TL- UO11 r2011 P318=9 ： M60 tool change by a
output signal
self-defined command
M8 Coolant ON UO10 r2010
P410_d7=0: Spindle control: Level
M9 Coolant OFF UO09 r2009
mode
P410_d3=1: Without spindle brake
MSP Spindle brake signal UO08 r2008
signal output
M3 Spindle CW rotation UO07 r2007
Spindle CCW P410_d2=1: Spindle CCW rotation
M4 UO06 r2006
rotation signal unused
P410_d7=0: Spindle control: Level
M5 Spindle stop UO05 r2005
mode
P310<4: Releasing this signal, with
S04/M44 Spindle gear output UO04 r2004
0/1/2/3 channel occupied
0/1/2 channel occupied
0/1 channel occupied
P310=0: Releasing this signal, with 0
channel occupied
4.6.5.11 List of Parameters Related to Input Interface Releasing
By parameter setting, the interfaces are not necessarily used for special signals. In this case, the
released interfaces can be used as common input interfaces; the interface parameters can be defined as
the released input interfaces. The parameters related to input interface releasing are as follows:
135
Special Common Variable Released as a common signal by a

Function
signal name signal name name parameter
Z/X/Y axis + direction P404_d6=1: Shielding the hard limit
+LT UI32 r1032
limit alarm
Z/X/Y axis － direction P404_d6=1: Shielding the hard limit
-LT UI31 r1031
limit alarm
P405_d1=0: Without Y axis
Y axis deceleration
DecY UI30 r1030 P406_d5=0: Without Y axis machine
signal
deceleration switch
X axis deceleration P406_d6=0: Without X axis machine
DecX UI29 r1029
Ⅰ
signal deceleration switch

Z axis deceleration P406_d7=0: Without Z axis machine
DecZ UI28 r1028
signal deceleration switch
OPERATION
P412_d7=0: Without external

SP External pause signal UI27 r1027
start/pause signal
External cycle start P412_d7=0: Without external
ST UI26 r1026
signal start/pause signal
P412_d6=0: Without an external
MXZ1 Feed hold signal UI16 r1016
feed/spindle hold knob
External feed/spindle P412_d6=0: Without external
MXZ2 UI15 r1015 feed/spindle hold knob
hold signal
P409_d7=1:: Chuck control function is
Chuck clamp in-position invalid
RM10 UI14 r1014
detection P409_d5=0: No chuck response
detection
P409_d7=1: Chuck control function is
Chuck releasing invalid.
RM11 UI13 r1013
in-position detection P409_d5=0: No chuck response
detection
P409_d4=1: Tailstock control function is
Input signal of hydraulic invalid.
TPS UI12 r1012
tailstock foot switch P409_d0=1: No hydraulic tailstock foot
switch input
P409_d7=1: Chuck control function is
Input signal of hydraulic invalid.
SHL UI11 r1011
chuck foot switch P409_d1=1: No hydraulic chuck foot
switch input.
PRES Low pressure detection UI10 r1010 P412_d5=0: No low pressure detection
P318=0: Line-up tool
P318=9: M60 tool change by a
Tool post clamp
TCP UI09 r1009 self-defined command
in-position signal
P408_d6=0: No tool post clamp
in-position signal
Tool post tool number
T1 UI01 r1001 P318=0 or 9
signal T1
T2 UI02 r1002 P318=0 or 9: P320<2 is released
signal T2
signal T3
signal T4
signal T5
T6 UI06 r1006 P318=0 or 9: P320<6 is released.
signal T6
signal T 7
signal T8
136
Chapter Four System Operation – Tool Offset
4.7 Tool Offset Operation Mode
Tool offset operation mode: The system compensates the tool offset. For each step of
operation, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. It is also available to
Ⅰ
press the hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system to view the operation key list for the
system tool compensation.
OPERATION
The explanations for the input format and examples about related setting and operation in the
manual are as follows: The function keys required to press are indicated by a sign; the letter keys,
numeric keys to be input are indicated by an underline; the prompt messages of the system are
indicated by a rectangle.
If incorrect data are input during the input of letters or figures, press key to delete
them, and then input the correct data
before confirmation, the current operation is quit.
There are 64 groups of tool offset values from T01～T64 set in this system, with each tool offset
number corresponding to one group. In each group are recorded five data, which are Z offset value, X
offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape, S tool setting record. Therein, by the manual tool setting
operation, the number of tool offset groups can be the same as the number of used tools. Other tool
offset data can only be input from the keyboard.
◆ The main functions of the tool offset operation mode consist of:
☆ Selecting, modifying and clearing tool offset data;
☆ Through a USB interface, transmitting the tool offset data between U disc and CNC system.
☆ Through RS232 communication interface, transmitting the tool offset data between external
computer and CNC system;
☆ Through RS232 communication interface, transmitting the tool offset data between two CNC
systems.
Press operation mode select key to enter Tool offset operation mode, as displayed in fig.
4-9. (Y axis offset value is invalid)
137
[ OFFSET ]　 hp2
OFFSET NO. Z X R T S Y
01 0001.111 -0001.111 0000.100 0 00 0001.111
02 0002.222 -0002.222 0000.200 0 00 0002.222
03 0003.333 -0003.333 0000.300 0 00 0002.222
04 0004.444 -0004.444 0000.000 0 00 0002.222
05 0000.000 0000.000 0000.000 0 00 0000.000

Ⅰ
06 0000.000 0000.000 0000.000 0 00 0000.000
07 0000.000 0000.000 0000.000 0 00 0000.000

OPERATION
EDIT JOG AUTO PARA OFFT DGN
Fig. 4-9 Tool compensation operation mode
4.7.1 Searching Tool Offset Value
The search of the tool offset value is to search the desired tool offset value; there are two methods:
Method one: Scanning

The contents of each tool offset value can be viewed in Tool Offset operation mode. By pressing
, key, the last or next tool offset value can be searched. By pressing , key,
the last page or next page of tool offset values can be searched, with each page containing 7 lines.
Method two: Searching

P + Offset number + ENTER .
4.7.2 Inputting Tool Offset Data from Keyboard
Range of word X, Z: -8000.000 mm～8000.000mm; Range of word R: 0 mm～8000.000mm;

Range of word T: Integer 0～8; Range of word S: Integer 0～16.
There are two ways to input tool offset data from the keyboard: absolute input and relative input.
The operations are as follows:
Absolute input of tool offset data:
1) Select Tool Offset operation mode.
2) Press , , , key to move the highlighted block cursor to the tool

offset number to be changed; or find the tool offset number to be changed using SEARCHING
method; then press , key to move the highlighted block cursor to the Z offset
value, X offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape or S tool setting record to be changed,
138
3) Press Input key, or directly input the desired data.
4) Input the desired data from the keyboard. During the data input, if incorrect data is input, press
key to cancel it then input the right value.
5) Press ENTER key to store the input data into the offset value of the currently-selected tool
offset number.
Ⅰ
6) If sign “*” appears ahead of the data to be changed, it means the data modification succeeds
OPERATION
Relative input of tool offset data:
1) Select Tool Offset operation mode; then move the highlighted block cursor to the data to be
changed.
2) Press INPUT key, or directly input the desired data from the keyboard.
3) Input the desired data from the keyboard. During the data input, if the input data is incorrect,
press key to cancel it then input the right value. By pressing ALTER key, the system
performs addition operation by adding the input data to the original value of the selected offset
value.
4.7.3 Clearing Offset Values of Each Group
The procedures of clearing the offset values of each group are as follows:
1) Select Tool Offset operation mode.
2) Move the highlighted block cursor to the S tool setting record of the tool offset number to be
cleared.
3) Press Delete key to clear the Z offset value, X offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape and S
tool setting record of the tool offset number.
4.7.4 Tool Compensation hp6 Function
By pressing hp6 key on the page of Tool Offset operation mode, the display is as follows:
Tool offset transfer menu

Key U – USB interface operation
Key R – RS232 interface operation
Key Z – Clearing all tool offse data
Key ESC – Exit
139
4.7.4.1 Communication and Standard Format of Tool Offset Data
1. Tool offset data transmission through USB interface:

In the root directory of the U disc, a folder with name “C001OFT” needs to be created. The naming
rule of the tool compensation file includes 10 characters, i.e. “OFT”+File number（3 digits）+“.TXT”. The
file number cannot be greater than 666, or the system will not list the file when reading the U disc. The
tool compensation files must be placed in the folder C001OFT.
Ⅰ
OPERATION
2. Tool offset data transmission through RS232 interface

For details about the operation of the transmission software using RS232, please see
PartⅠOperation: Chapter Five RS232 and USB System Communication. The transmission of the tool
compensation can be completed according to the system operation prompts.
3. Standard format of TXT Tool Compensation File on PC

On a PC, it is possible to edit tool compensation files using TXT, LST text. but the file name and its
contents must be edited in the standard format required in the system, so that the files can be sent to the
system correctly. The specifications are as follows:
1) On a personal computer, the user should name the tool compensation file with suffix TXT or LST,
e.g. “OFT088.TXT”; It is recommended that the user use suffix TXT for the convenience of the
parameter file operation on the PC.
2) The first line of the contents of the TXT file must be the tool compensation mark:
“CNC_GSKC001”; which is indispensable.
3) The contents behind “//” are the annotation, which lists in turn the offset number, Z offset value,
X offset value, tool radius, tool shape, tool setting record.
4) The contents of the tool compensation must be consistent with the requirement of the standard
format.
E.g. T01： 00000.000， 00000.000， 00000.000， 0， 00
Thereinto:
◆ Range of tool number: 01～64. If it is exceeded, the system processes it as an error;
◆ Offset number format: Three parts: T + Number (01～64) + : , which are indispensable.
◆ A comma must be used to separate different tool compensation data in a line;
◆ There are five compensation data for each line. More than five data indicates there are illegal
characters in the tool compensation data;
◆ If there are less than five tool compensation data in a line (i.e. not all Z offset value +X offset
value + R tool radius +T tool shape + S tool setting record are included), the system
processes the data as Z offset value , X offset value , R tool radius, T tool shape and S tool
setting record from left to right; if the data at the end of a line need to be modified, the data
at the beginning should be added first. The values of Z, X, R, T and S cannot exceed their
respectively-specified ranges.
140
【Example】
CNC_GSKC001
// Tool No. Z offset X offset Tool nose radius Imaginary tool nose Clamp tool NO.
T01: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00002.000, 0, 00
T02: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T03: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
Ⅰ
T04: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T05: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
OPERATION
T06: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T07: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
………………………………………………………………………………..…
T63: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T64: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
4.7.4.2 Tool Compensation Data Clearing
First set bit parameter P416_d5=0 (Clearing all tool compensation values in Tool Offset mode is
allowed), then press hp6 key in the Tool Offset operation mode, finally press Z key to clear all the tool
compensation data.
141
4.8 Diagnosis Operation Mode
Diagnosis operation mode: The system detects and displays the states of input/output (I/0)
signals, spindle speed, encoder lines in real time. For details about the operation key list for the
system diagnosis, press hp2 key on the upper right corner of the system.
Ⅰ
◆ The main functions of the diagnosis mode consist of:

OPERATION
☆ Self-diagnosis function;
☆ Displaying the states of the input/output (IO) signals;
☆ Diagnosis of spindle control function input, output signals.
☆ Diagnosis of tool post control function input, output signals;
☆ Diagnosis of hard limit signals for each axis;
☆ Diagnosis of machine zero point (machine reference point ) signal for each axis;
☆ Diagnosis of spindle speed and encoder lines
Press operation mode select key to enter the page of Diagnosis operation mode, as
displayed in figure 4-10:
[ DIAGNOSIS ] Input interface hp2
UI01 1 UI09 1 UI17 1 UI25 1 ALZ 1

UI02 1 UI10 1 UI18 1 UI26 1 ALX1 Spindle speed
UI03 1 SHL 1 UI19 1 UI27 1 ALY 1 0000
UI04 1 TPS 1 UI20 1 UI28 1 PCZ 1 Encoder lines
UI05 1 UI13 1 UI21 1 UI29 1 PCX 1 0000
UI06 1 UI14 1 UI22 1 UI30 1 PCY 1
UI07 1 UI15 1 UI23 1 -LT 1 PA 1
UI08 1 UI16 1 UI24 1 +LT 1 API 1
EDIT JOG AUTO PARA OFFT DNG
Fig. 4-10 Diagnosis operation mode
4.8.1 Searching Interface Signal
First set bit parameter P415_d3=1 (the diagnosis page prompt is ON). In the Diagnosis operation
mode, not only the explanations of each I/O but also the common signal name, hardware interface and
pin number of each I/O can be viewed; if the bit parameter is set to OFF, it is unavailable to view the
relative explanations.
Press , , , key to search each I/O. The I/O searched is highlighted.
142
Chapter Four System Operation – Diagnosis
Press or key to display the pages of input interface and output interface alternately.
4.8.2 Explanations for Display of Interface Signals Names
This system has 23-channel switch value input signals and 18-channel switch value output signals;
Ⅰ
each signal has a name, which indicates the meaning of the signal.
Common signal name: The names of input signals are UI01～UI32, and those of output signals are
OPERATION
UO01～UO32, with each signal corresponding to one pin. Thereinto, UI17～UI25 signals and UO19～
UO32 signals are not led out in the interfaces.
Special signal name: For a specific machine tool, once a signal is occupied by a special function,
the signal is assigned a special name. The system sets a standard special signal name for the signal to
be used by each function.
On the display of Diagnosis, the signal used by a special function is indicated by a special signal
name; it means this function is set enabled in the parameter. The initialization parameters in the system
has enabled most of the auxiliary functions. Thus most of pin signals are displayed with a special signal
name, while the unoccupied signals are displayed with a common signal name.
For the explanations and connection of command signal names and special signal names, please
refer to Part Ⅲ Connection in this manual.
4.8.3 Explanation of Input Interface Diagnosis
On the display of input interface diagnosis, when an external signal is valid, its corresponding bit is
displayed as 0; when an external signal is invalid, its corresponding bit is displayed as 1. The diagnosis
of input interface signals is performed recurrently all the time, displaying the current signal states
anytime.
The definition of the input interface signal is determined by parameter. Therefore, the definition
varies with the corresponding setting of the parameter.
【Example】
The standard configuration of the electric tool post is 4 stations. When electric tool post
configuration of the system is 4 stations, the diagnosis messages are shown as follows:
The auxiliary parameter P320 is 4; parameter P319 is 4; parameter P318 is 1: Electric tool post.
The leftmost column on the diagnosis input page displays the diagnosis messages of T1 ~ T4.
4.8.4 Explanation of Output Interface Diagnosis
When the bit in the output interface diagnosis is displayed as 0, the output of the corresponding bit is
valid; and when the bit is displayed as 1, the output is invalid. The output interface diagnosis displays the
current hold state of each output bit. If the signal is pulse, and the pulse time is short, the output of the bit
is valid, but it is still displayed as 1.
143
The definition of the output interface signal is also determined by the parameter, and the definition
varies with the setting of the parameter.
4.8.5 Output Interface Operation Function
Move the cursor to the input signal to be modified using direction keys, and change the value of the
output signal where the cursor is located by pressing 1 or 0 key. If the value differs from the current value,
Ⅰ
it is displayed in red; if the value is the same as the current value, it is displayed in yellow.
OPERATION
【Note】
Diagnosis output interface operation is used for system debugging. For system safety, the
operation is available only when the parameter password level is higher than 2.
4.8.6 Spindle Encoder and Spindle Speed Detection
The system can detect and display the pulse number per revolution for the spindle encoder, and
display the number of lines of the encoder automatically according to the detection result.
The number of lines of the encoder indicates the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder in
use.
The spindle speed indicates the current spindle actual speed (unit: r/min).
【Explanation】
1) If the spindle is not started, the spindle speed is displayed as 0.
2) When the spindle is started, and the initial page of the Diagnosis operation mode is entered, if
the detected number of lines of the encoder is inconsistent with the number of lines of the
spindle encoder, the system prompts: [Diagnosis check prompt]: Encoder line number
inconsistent with parameter.
3) The spindle encoder rotates simultaneously with the spindle: I.e. each time the spindle rotates
one revolution, the encoder also rotates one revolution; otherwise, the spindle speed detected
is inconsistent with the actual value.
4.8.7 Diagnosis hp6 Function
Press hp6 key on the diagnosis page, then the display is as follows:
Key 0 – Viewing alarm messages Key 1 –Viewing color coding

Key 2 – Entering keyboard test Key 3 –Viewing CPLD pulse number
Key 4 – Viewing version info. Key 5 –RAM import/export
ESC -– Exit
Key 0 – Viewing alarm messages: Displaying the system alarm record;

Key 1 – Viewing color coding: Displaying 256 kinds of color and code, e.g. 00 indicates black, FF
144
indicates white;
Key 2 – Keyboard test: Testing the keyboard;
Key 3 – Viewing CPLD pulse number: Displaying the number of pulses of X/Y/Z;
Key 4 – Version information: Displaying the system version information: System software, CPLD
version information and software version re-loading operation;
Key 5 – RAM import and export: The system RAM is transmitted through U disc or serial port
Ⅰ
RS232.
1. RAM data transmission through USB interface
OPERATION
It is required to create a folder with name “C001RAM” in the root directory of U disc. The naming
rule of the system RAM file includes 10 characters, which are “RAM”+File number（3 digits）+“.TXT”. The
file number cannot be greater than 999, or the system does not list the file when reading the U disc. The
memory file must be placed in the folder C001RAM. If there is no such a folder, the system prompts: No
RAM file in the directory after detection. After opening the RAM directory page, the system can only send
the RAM files.
2. RAM data transmission through RS232 interface
This CNC system can transmit RAM data through RS232 interface. It is possible to complete the
RAM transmission in terms of the operation prompts provided by the system.
【Note】
1) It is suggested that the user not use hp6 function key.
2) For the system safety, it is allowed to operate the RAM and load and upgrade the version
only when the parameter password level is higher than level 2.
4.8.7.1 Display of Alarm Record
In the Diagnosis operation mode, press hp6 key, then 0 key. Then the system displays the alarm
record messages, as shown in figure 4-11.
Alarm record function: The system records the alarm messages in detail. For each step of
operation, the system provides corresponding intelligent prompt messages. It is also available to view
the operation key list for the system alarm record function by pressing the hp2 key on the upper right
corner of the system.
This system is capable of storing up to 4031 alarm messages. When the alarm record number
exceeds 4031, the system will automatically delete the oldest alarm messages, and display the newest
alarm messages. Therefore, it is necessary for the operator to download and save the alarm record, lest
the old alarm record cannot be referred to.
◆ The main functions of the alarm record consist of:

☆ Searching the number of startup times, alarm messages
☆ Displaying the total alarm record counts, the record counts required to list according to parameter
setting, and the current record number.
☆ Transmitting the alarm record to a U disc through USB interface.
☆ Transmitting the alarm record to the external computer through RS232 communication interface.
145
Total records：890 Displayed records：220 No. 0220 hp2
NO.125 90:59:02 E346 Tailstock retracting response detection overtime alarm

1001:20:59 M05 Spindle stop
2001:05:59 %028 Part program change
NO.126 00:01:59 E367 Chuck unclamp in-position signal abnormal
Ⅰ
01:11:20 E606 Illegal use of M91; M91 not defined in interface parameter
OPERATION
01:21:59 E302 Z driver alarm

NO.129 00:40:20 E303 X driver alarm
120:40:20 E317 X tool nose - direction soft limit alarm
Fig. 4-11 Alarm record display
【Example】
E.g. latest alarm record: 120:40:20 E317 X tool nose – direction soft limit alarm
Thereinto, the system startup times is the NO.129 displayed in the last alarm record, i.e. the time
this alarm record (220th) occurs is 120 hours 40 minutes and 20 seconds after the 129th startup. The
contents of the alarm is “E317: X tool nose – direction soft limit alarm”.
【Note】
1) When replacing a program, the alarm record will display the program number; just like %028 in
figure 4-13, which indicates the part program is changed to %028 after 2001 hour 05 minute 59
second after the 125th startup.
2) The maximum time displayed for the alarm record is 99999 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds;
the maximum number of startup times displayed for the alarm record is 999.
3) The current alarm record is highlighted, and on the right side of the scrollbar is displayed the
position where the current alarm record is located among all the displayed alarm records.
4) The alarm record is a search function provided in some special cases; the operator should not
operate it without special reasons.
4.8.7.2 Searching Alarm Record
The alarm record search is to search the specified alarm record, view the identical alarm records, or
count the number of error numbers which is the same as the error number (alarm number in system
alarm message, e.g. E001) of the current alarm record. There are three methods:
Method one: Scanning
It is possible to view the contents of the record on the alarm record display page. By pressing
, key, you can view the last or next record. By pressing , key, you can
view the last or next page of records, with each page displaying up to 8 lines.
146
Method two: Positioning

P + Record number + ENTER . (Record number means：Nth piece of alarm record)
Method three: Others

F + Searching type + Number + ENTER
The searching type includes: E—by alarm error number, M— by spindle command, T— By tool
Ⅰ
change number, P— by program number; press E, M, T or P key to enter the search modes of different
types.
OPERATION
In addition, the system provides the function of viewing the identical alarm records. By pressing
, key, you can view the alarm records which is identical with the current one upward and
downward.
By pressing key, you can count the number of alarm records which is identical with the
current one; The display window disappears in 5 seconds, or it disappears immediately within 5 seconds
if any other key is pressed.
Parameters relative to the alarm record function: P417, P418.
4.8.7.3 Alarm Record hp6 Function
By pressing hp6 key on the alarm record display page, the display is as follows:
Alarm record sending mode select

Key U – USB interface transmission
Key R – RS232 interface transmission
Key ESC – Return
1. Sending alarm records through USB interface:

The alarm records sent through the USB interface are saved in the folder “C001ERR” in the root
directory of the U disc. The naming rule of the alarm record files includes 10 characters, which are
“ERR”+ File number（3 digits）+“.TXT”. The file number cannot be greater than 254.
2. Alarm records sent through RS232 interface
For the operation of the communication software using RS232 for transmission, see Chapter Five
RS232 and USB System Communication in PartⅠOperation. GSKCOM_C001.EXE can realize the file
transmission between PC and CNC, which is easy to operate and has high communication efficiency
and high reliability. The transmission of alarm records can be completed by following the system
operation prompts.
147
4.8.8 Machine Auxiliary Function Control
You can execute the machine auxiliary functions by using the auxiliary function keys on the
operation panel, rather than by inputting commands.
Press key: The spindle rotates clockwise. When bit parameter P410_d7=0, the LED
Ⅰ
indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M3 in the output interface
displays 0. (When bit parameter P410_d7=1, the LED indicator lights up, and
OPERATION
M3 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the pulse output, the
corresponding bit of M3 displays 1.)
Press key: The spindle stops. (When bit parameter P410_d7=1, the diagnosis output
interface page displays M5.)
Press key: The spindle rotates counterclockwise. When bit parameter P410_d7=0,
P410_d2=0, the LED indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M41 in
the output interface displays 0. (When P410_d7=1, P410_d2=0, the LED
indicator lights up, M4 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the
pulse output, the corresponding bit of M4 displays 1. When bit parameter
P410_d2=1, the diagnosis output interface page does not display M4.)
Press key: The coolant switches between ON/OFF. When bit parameter P410_d7=0 and
the coolant is ON, the LED indicator lights up, and the corresponding bit of M8
in the output interface displays 0; when the coolant is OFF, the LED indicator
goes out, and the corresponding bit of M8 in the output port displays 1. (When
P410_d7=1 and the coolant is ON, the LED indicator lights up, and the
corresponding bit of M8 in the output port firstly outputs validity. After the pulse
output, the corresponding bit of M8 displays 1. When the coolant is OFF, the
indicator goes out, M9 in the output interface firstly outputs validity. After the
pulse output, the corresponding bit of M9 displays 1.)
Press key: Used for spindle gear cycle. The spindle motor executes S01～S04 or S00～
S15 (based on the setting of parameter P410_d6, P410_d5)
Press key: The tool post rotates to the next tool number, and the tool number state is
displayed on the corresponding position of input interfaces T1~T4.
148
Chapter Five System Communication
CHAPTER FIVE RS232 AND USB SYSTEM COMMUNICATION
This system can transmit the part programs, system parameters, system software and tool offsets
through RS232 and USB interfaces; for the operation of the part program transmission, see Section
4.3.3 “Edit Operation Mode” in PartⅠOperation; for the operation of the transmission of system
Ⅰ
parameters and system software, see Section 4.6.3 “Parameter Operation Mode” in PartⅠ; for the
OPERATION
operation of tool offset transmission, see Section 4.7.4 “Tool Offset Operation Mode” in PartⅠ.
5.1 RS232 Communication
RS232 communication is the serial port communication mode, which realizes data transmission
between CNC and PC, or between CNC and CNC, through the serial port communication cable (with
three lines).
5.1.1 Communication between CNC and PC
The file sending and receiving between CNC and PC is realized by the communication software
GSKCOM_C001.EXE. The software is easy to operate, and characterized by high communication
efficiency and reliability.
1) PC configuration:
Hardware: Common-use PC with RS232 serial port; serial port communication cable (with three
lines)
Operation system: Microsoft Windows 98/2000/2003/XP.
2) Introduction to GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software:
See the communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE on PC.
【Preparation before communication】

1) Connect the communication cable on the condition that both PC and CNC are powered off:
Insert DB9 female plug into the RS232 communication interface on the front cover of the CNC,
and insert the other DB9 female plug into the 9-pin serial port (COM1or COM2) on the PC;
2) Select the port and baudrate for communication on PC. The communication baudrate is
determined by the sender.
◆ Setting the port of GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software on PC
After running the communication software, leftclick to select “port number”, selecting the
communication serial port..
◆ Setting the baudrate of GSKCOM_C001.EXE communication software on PC
After running the communication software, leftclick the “baudrate” to select the communication
baudrate (Set to: 38400 (unit：b/s））
149
3) Set the communication baudrate of bit parameters P414_d7, P414_d6: See Section 4.6
“Parameter Operation Mode” in PartⅠOperation.
5.1.2 Communication between CNC and CNC
For convenient operation, it is allowed to transmit data between two CNC systems (both are
Ⅰ
GSK928TD) . The CNC for sending data is referred to as the sender; while the CNC for receiving the
data is the receiver, as shown in the figure below:
OPERATION
CNC1 CNC2
Sender Receiver
【Preparation before communication】
1) Connect the communication cable on the condition that both CNC systems are powered off:
Insert the DB9 female plug into the RS232 communication interface on the front cover of each
CNC.
2) Set the communication baudrate of bit parameters P414_d7, P414_d6: See Section 4.6
“Parameter Operation Mode” in Part Ⅰ Operation.
【Precautions for data communication between two CNC systems】
1) The sender and receiver are in the same operation mode (Edit, Parameter, Tool Compensation);
2) During parameter sending or receiving, the sender and receiver must enter corresponding
operation authority.
3) The operation procedures are the same as those of “data sending” and “data receiving” of the
communication software GSKCOM_C001.EXE.
【Note】
1) To stop the transmission, press “Cancel” button on the communication software; or
press RESET key or ESC key on the CNC.
2) Do not turn off the power during the data transmission,. Otherwise, the data
transmission error may occur.
3) The communication cable for the communication between CNC and PC is the same as
that for the communication between CNC and CNC.
5.2 USB Communication
This system supports USB communication mode, thus realizing the data transmission between
CNC and U disc with the USB interface.
150
Chapter Five System Communication
5.2.1 USB Operation
When performing USB operation, insert the U disc directly into the USB interface on the system
panel. If the U disc contains the folder and file names created in accordance with the system
requirements in its rooted directory, the system automatically identifies and opens the U disc. At the
same time, on the system interface is displayed the USB icon.
【Note】
Ⅰ
1) After the U disc operation, the user must press ESC key to turn off the U disc before
OPERATION
pulling it out. Then when the USB icon displayed on the system interface disappears,
pull the U disc out from the USB interface. Otherwise, the system hardware and U disc
may be damaged.
2) Never attempt to pull the U disc out when its indicator is blinking, because it is reading or
writing data at this moment. Pulling it out halfway may cause damage to the hardware or
result in data loss.
3) A U disc generally has a write-protect switch. The switch should be performed before the
U disc is inserted into the system interface rather than during the U disc running.
4) The storage size of the U disc should be as small as possible, in case that the
communication speed between system and U disc is affected. It is suggested that the
user not use those removable storage devices with a size larger than 8G. Otherwise, the
system hardware and the devices may be damaged.
5) When the U disc operation fails, press RESET key on the system, and then re-insert the U
disc after pulling it out.
5.2.2 USB File Directory Requirements
When transmitting different kinds of data during USB communication, the system requires different
names for the USB files. The folder names required to create in the rooted directory of U disc are as
follows:
System
Data type Parameter Tool offset
Part program software
Name type data data
upgrade
Folder name in rooted
C001PRO C001PAR C001OFT C001DATA
directory of U disc
File name in folder CNCxxx.TXT PARxxx.TXT OFTxxx.TXT DATAxxx.TXT
Range of XXX in file
0～254 0～999 0～999 0～254
name
Data type Memory whole

Alarm history System RAM
Name type upgrade
Folder name in U disc
C001MEMO C001ERR C001RAM
rooted directory
File name in folder MEMOxxx.TXT ERR xxx.TXT RAMxxx.TXT
XXX range in file name 0～254 0～999 0～999
151
Ⅰ
OPERATION
152

2 Operacion

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 Operacion

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 Operacion

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This manual is used for both GSK928TD system and

GSK928TD-L system. However, the contents are described based on

This manual describes the various matters concerning the

This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co.,

Improper operations may cause unexpected accidents.

Before using the system, please read this manual thoroughly.

Note the following precautions before using the manual:

● Connect the Emergency Stop button of the system. As the emergency

● Set the program reference point according to the actual installation

Special notes: The power supply fixed on/in the cabinet is

Warning Failure to observe the specified operation methods or

Caution Improper operation may cause personal injury or equipment

Note Improper use may cause damage to the equipment and

Caution ● It is not allowed to use damaged or defective products.

2) Transport and storage

Caution ● The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must

Note ● The connection must be proper and firm.

Warning ● Only qualified operators can operate the system.

Warning ● Prevent the system from environmental interference.

Caution ● Unqualified persons cannot repair the system.

Ⅲ Safety and precautions for programming

2) G00 rapid traverse

3) Use of this manual

4) Functions of the CNC and machine tool

Ⅳ Precautions and warnings for operation

1） Before machining a part

2） Before operating the machine tool

6） Manual reference point return

This user manual shall be kept by the end user.

4.3.5 Function of hp5 Key···················································································································35

4.5.5.2 MPG Speed Control·············································································································· 81

4.7.3 Clearing Offset Values of Each Group ·····················································································139

6.5.1 Alarm in Executing Relative Operations (i.e. E300~E399) ····················································270

3.4.3.5 Tool Change Mode 4 ·········································································································· 325

CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW

9 Installation dimension, electrical characteristics and part of interfaces compatible with

CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

2.1 928TD Technical Specifications

CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL

3.2 LED Status Indicator

3.3.1 Character Key

Character keys consist of numbers, letters and some signs.

3.3.2 Operation Mode Select Key

selects Edit operation mode

selects Manual operation mode

selects AUTO operation mode

selects Parameter operation mode

selects Tool Offset operation mode

selects Diagnosis operation mode

3.3.3 Function Key

Single/Continuous key selects Single/Continuous mode in AUTO operation mode; in

3.3.5 Manual Axis Control Key

In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in negative direction.

In MANUAL operation mode, X axis is moved in positive direction.

In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in negative direction.

In MANUAL operation mode, Z axis is moved in positive direction.

In MANUAL operation mode, it is Single Step/MPG Step Width Selection; in other

Step/JOG key It selects Step/JOG operation in MANUAL operation mode.

3.3.6 Manual Auxiliary Function Key